Contents

Toyota Camry HV 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 612
1 of 612

Summary of Content for Toyota Camry HV 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1

1 Before driving Information on the hybrid system and adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.

2 When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.

3 Interior fea- tures

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in- terior features for a comfortable driving experience.

4 Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it- yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.

5 When trouble arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident.

6 Vehicle specifications Detailed vehicle information.

7 For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

2

1-1. Hybrid system

Hybrid system ...................... 30

Hybrid system precautions ........................ 35

Energy monitor/ consumption screen........... 41

Hybrid vehicle driving tips .... 46

1-2. Key information

Keys ..................................... 48

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart key system................. 51

Wireless remote control ....... 64

Doors.................................... 67

Trunk .................................... 72

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats ........................... 76

Rear seats............................ 79

Head restraints..................... 81

Seat belts ............................. 83

Steering wheel ..................... 90

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror.......................... 91

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 93

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows..................... 95

Moon roof ............................. 98

1-6. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap.................................... 102

1-7. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system............. 106

Alarm .................................. 108

1-8. Safety information

Correct driving posture ....... 111

SRS airbags ....................... 113

Front passenger occupant classification system......... 125

Child restraint systems ....... 131

Installing child restraints ..... 135

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle .............. 146

Power (ignition) switch........ 157

EV drive mode .................... 165

Hybrid transmission ............ 168

Turn signal lever ................. 170

Parking brake ..................... 172

Horn.................................... 173

1 Before driving

2 When driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

3

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters................ 174

Indicators and warning lights ................................. 180

Multi-information display ..... 185

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch.................. 192

Fog light switch ................... 198

Windshield wipers and washer .............................. 200

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control...................... 204

Driving assist systems ........ 207

Hill-start assist control......... 212

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) .......... 214

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage ............. 224

Vehicle load limits ............... 228

Winter driving tips ............... 229

Trailer towing ...................... 233

Dinghy towing ..................... 234

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system.............................. 238

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ......................... 248

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types ............ 249

Audio system...................... 251

Steering wheel audio switches ........................... 254

USB/AUX port .................... 256

Basic audio operations ....... 258

Setup menu........................ 261

General settings ................. 262

Audio settings..................... 264

Display settings .................. 265

Voice settings ..................... 267

Selecting the audio source .............................. 268

List screen operation .......... 269

Optimal use of the audio system.............................. 271

Radio operation .................. 272

CD player operation ........... 274

Listening to an iPod............ 281

Listening to a USB memory device................. 287

Using the AUX port............. 293

Preparations to use wireless communication ................. 294

3 Interior features

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

4

Registering a Bluetooth audio player for the first time ........................... 298

Registering a Bluetooth phone for the first time ..... 299

Registering a Bluetooth device............................... 300

Connecting a Bluetooth device............................... 303

Displaying a Bluetooth device details ................... 306

Detailed Bluetooth system settings ................ 308

Listening to Bluetooth audio ................................ 310

Using a Bluetooth phone ............................... 312

Making a call ...................... 314

Receiving a call .................. 318

Speaking on the phone ...... 319

Bluetooth phone message function............. 323

Using the steering wheel switches ........................... 328

Bluetooth phone settings............................. 329

Contact/Call history settings............................. 331

What to do if... (Troubleshooting) ............. 342

Bluetooth.......................... 346

Voice command system ..... 350

Rear view monitor system.............................. 353

3-3. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list.................. 364 Interior lights ..................... 365 Personal lights .................. 366

3-4. Using the storage features

List of storage features ....... 367 Glove box ......................... 368 Console box ..................... 369 Coin holder ....................... 370 Bottle holders ................... 371 Cup holders ...................... 372 Auxiliary boxes ................. 374

3-5. Other interior features

Sun visors........................... 376

Vanity mirrors ..................... 377

Clock................................... 378

Outside temperature display .............................. 379

Ashtray ............................... 380

Power outlets...................... 381

Seat heaters ....................... 383

Armrest ............................... 385

Assist grips ......................... 386

Coat hooks ......................... 387

Floor mat ............................ 388

Trunk features .................... 390

Garage door opener ........... 391

Compass ............................ 398

Safety Connect ................... 402

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

5

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior............ 410

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior............. 413

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements..................... 416

General maintenance.......... 418

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs........................... 422

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions ....................... 423

Hood ................................... 426

Positioning a floor jack ........ 427

Engine compartment........... 429

12-volt battery ..................... 439

Tires .................................... 443

Tire inflation pressure ......... 449

Wheels ................................ 453

Air conditioning filter............ 456

Electronic key battery.......... 458

Checking and replacing fuses ................................. 460

Light bulbs........................... 471

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers............ 484

If your vehicle needs to be towed........................... 485

If you think something is wrong............................ 489

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... .......................... 490

If a warning message is displayed .......................... 500

If you have a flat tire ........... 519

If the hybrid system will not start ............................ 531

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P ................... 533

If you lose your keys........... 534

If the electronic key does not operate properly ......... 535

If the vehicles 12-volt battery is discharged ........ 538

If your vehicle overheats .... 542

If the vehicle becomes stuck................................. 547

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency ....................... 548

4 Maintenance and care 5 When trouble arises

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

6

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 550

Fuel information ................. 561

Tire information .................. 564

6-2. Customization

Customizable features ....... 576

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize................. 582

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ................ 584

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)........................ 585

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)........................ 587

Abbreviation list ........................ 598

Alphabetical index .................... 599

What to do if............................... 611

6 Vehicle specifications

7 For owners

Index

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

7

8

Headlights (low beam) P. 192

Pictorial index Exterior

Fog lights P. 198

Front turn signal/parking lights P. 170

Hood P. 426

Windshield wipers P. 200

Outside rear view

mirrors P. 93

Front side marker lights P. 192

Moon roof P. 98 Headlights (high beam) and

daytime running lights P. 194

9

Tires

Rotation

Replacement

Inflation pressure

Information

P. 443

P. 519

P. 558

P. 564

Trunk P. 72

Doors P. 67

Fuel filler door P. 102 Rear turn signal lights P. 170

Rear window defogger P. 248

Stop/tail lights P. 192

Rear side marker lights P. 192

License plate lights P. 192

: If equipped

10

InteriorPictorial index

Glove box P. 368

Front seats P. 76

SRS side airbags P. 113

SRS driver airbag P. 113

Console box P. 369

A

Head restraints P. 81

Seat belts P. 83

Cup holder P. 372

Armrest P. 385

Power window

switches P. 95 SRS knee

airbags P. 113

SRS front passenger

airbag P. 113

11

A

Interior lights P. 365

Vanity mirrors P. 377

Sun visors P. 376

SRS curtain shield airbags P. 113

Compass P. 398

Garage door opener switches P. 391

Auxiliary box P. 374

Personal lights P. 366

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 91

Vehicles without moon roof

Microphone *1 P. 313

Coat hooks P. 387

Assist grips P. 386

: If equipped *1: For vehicles with a navigation system or Entune Audio Plus, refer to Navigation and

Multimedia System Owners Manual.

12

Pictorial index Interior

A

SOS button P. 402

Interior light P. 365

Vanity mirrors P. 377

Moon roof switches P. 98

Sun visors P. 376

SRS curtain shield airbags P. 113

Compass P. 398

Garage door opener switches P. 391

Auxiliary box P. 374

Vehicles with moon roof

Personal lights P. 366

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 91

Microphone *1

Coat hooks P. 387

Assist grips P. 386

13

Outside rear view mirror switches P. 93

B

Window lock switch P. 95

Power window switches P. 95

Door lock switch P. 67Inside lock button P. 67

: If equipped *1: For vehicles with a navigation system or Entune Audio Plus, refer to Navigation and

Multimedia System Owners Manual.

14

C

Shift lever P. 168

Cup holders P. 372

Pictorial index Interior

Auxiliary box P. 374

Power outlet P. 381

Shift lock override

button P. 533

: If equipped

15

Power (ignition) switch P. 157

Gauges and meters

Multi-information display

P. 174

P. 185

Tilt and telescopic steering control lever P. 90

Pictorial index

Trunk opener P. 72

Headlight switch

Turn signal lever

Fog light switch

P. 192

P. 170

P. 198

Instrument panel

Audio system , *1

Navigation system , *2 P. 249

Windshield wiper and washer switch P. 200

Clock P. 378

Parking brake pedal P. 172 Hood lock release

lever P. 426

Fuel filler door opener P. 102

Horn P. 173

: If equipped *1: For Entune Audio Plus, refer to Navigation and Multimedia System Owners Manual. *2: Refer to Navigation and Multimedia System Owners Manual.

Floor mat P. 388

16

Emergency flasher switch P. 484

Security indicator P. 106, 108

A

Air conditioning system P. 238

Pictorial index Instrument panel

Rear window defogger switch

Outside rear view mirror defogger switch

P. 248

P. 248

17

B

Cruise control switch P. 204

Talk switch *1 P. 350

DISP switch P. 186

Telephone switches *1 P. 328Audio remote control

switches *1 P. 254

: If equipped *1: For vehicles with a navigation system or Entune Audio Plus, refer to Navigation and

Multimedia System Owners Manual.

18

C

Power outlet P. 381

AUX port/USB port *1 P. 256

Pictorial index Instrument panel

Seat heater switches P. 383

ECO MODE switch P. 169

EV MODE switch P. 165

19

D

VSC OFF switch P. 208

Coin holder P. 370

Headlight leveling dial P. 194

BSM main switch P. 214

: If equipped *1: For vehicles with a navigation system or Entune Audio Plus, refer to Navigation and

Multimedia System Owners Manual.

20

For your information

Main Owners Manual

Please note that this manual covers all models and all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system

Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

21

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

Cruise control system

Anti-lock brake system

SRS airbag system

Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or spe- cial instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline pow- ered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding.

Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio.

22

Vehicle data recordings

Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:

Engine speed Electric motor speed (traction motor speed) Accelerator status Brake status Vehicle speed Shift position Hybrid battery (traction battery) status

The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record con- versations, sounds or pictures.

Data usage

Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunc- tions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased

In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern- ment agency

For use by Toyota in a law suit For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or

vehicle owner

Usage of data collected through Safety Connect (U.S.mainland only)

If your Toyota has Safety Connect and if you have subscribed to those ser- vices, please refer to the Safety Connect Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.

23

Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur- pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fas-

tened; How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake

pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ- ation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi- tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

24

Disclosure of the EDR data

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

An agreement from the vehicles owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained

In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern- ment agency

For use by Toyota in a law suit

However, if necessary, Toyota may:

Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing

information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These compo- nents may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote con- trol batteries.

25

CAUTION

General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ- ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi- cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis- tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

General precaution regarding childrens safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

26

CAUTION

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

Never resell, hand over or modify the hybrid battery. To prevent accidents, hybrid batteries that have been removed from a disposed vehicle are col- lected through Toyota dealers. Do not dispose of the battery yourself.

Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in death or serious injury:

The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and someone may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric shock.

The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with your hybrid vehi- cle. If the hybrid battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any way, accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an explosion and electrolyte leakage may occur.

When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is extremely high because the person receiving the vehicle may not be aware of these dangers.

Disposal of the hybrid battery (traction battery)

If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid battery must be disposed of by your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock that can result in death or serious injury.

27

Symbols used throughout this manual

Cautions & Notices

Symbols used in illustrations

CAUTION

This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause death or serious injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of death or serious injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its equipment.

Safety symbol

The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means Do not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen.

Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.

Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).

28

Before driving 1

29

1-1. Hybrid system

Hybrid system .................... 30

Hybrid system precautions ...................... 35

Energy monitor/ consumption screen......... 41

Hybrid vehicle driving tips........................ 46

1-2. Key information

Keys ................................... 48

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart key system .............. 51

Wireless remote control ..... 64

Doors ................................. 67

Trunk.................................. 72

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats ......................... 76

Rear seats.......................... 79

Head restraints................... 81

Seat belts ........................... 83

Steering wheel ................... 90

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror................ 91

Outside rear view mirrors.............................. 93

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows .................. 95

Moon roof........................... 98

1-6. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap .................. 102

1-7. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system .......... 106

Alarm................................ 108

1-8. Safety information

Correct driving posture..... 111

SRS airbags..................... 113

Front passenger occupant classification system ........................... 125

Child restraint systems..... 131

Installing child restraints ........................ 135

30

1-1. Hybrid system

Hybrid system

Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from

conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the char-

acteristics of your vehicle, and operate with care.

The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an

electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions,

improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.

Gasoline engine

Electric motor (traction motor)

When stopped/during take-off

The gasoline engine stops when the vehicle is stopped. During start-off, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped and the motor is used.

31

1-1. Hybrid system

1

B efore driving

Vehicle Proximity Notification System

When the gasoline engine is off while driving, a sound is produced to warn pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area that the vehicle is approaching. The pitch of the sound adjusts according to vehicle speed. When vehicle speed is approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or more, the warning system turns off.

During normal driving

The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery as necessary.

When accelerating sharply

The power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine via the electric motor (traction motor).

When braking (regenerative braking)

The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery).

32

1-1. Hybrid system

Regenerative braking

In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery).

The accelerator pedal is released.

The brake pedal is depressed with the shift lever in D or B.

EV indicator

Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop

The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions:

During gasoline engine warm-up

During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging

When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or low

When the heater is switched on

The EV indicator comes on when the vehicle is driven using only the electric motor (traction motor) or the gasoline engine is stopped.

33

1-1. Hybrid system

1

B efore driving

Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)

As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery will slowly dis- charge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid bat- tery becomes fully discharged and you are unable to jump-start the vehi- cle with the 12-volt battery, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged. Always put the shift lever in P when the vehicle is stopped. When driving in heavy traffic, operate the vehicle with the shift lever in D or B to avoid discharging the battery.

Charging the 12-volt battery

P. 540

After the 12-volt battery has discharged or has been changed or removed

The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is running on the hybrid battery (traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Toyota dealer.

34

1-1. Hybrid system

Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

There may be no engine sounds or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move. Always shift the shift lever to P when parked.

The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating and are not a malfunction:

Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment.

Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind the rear seats when the hybrid system starts or stops.

Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the trunk lid is open.

Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the hybrid system starts or stops.

Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.

Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is depressed.

Operational sounds and motor sounds may be heard when the brake pedal is operated.

Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.

Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vent beside the rear left seat.

Vehicle Proximity Notification System

In the following cases, the Vehicle Proximity Notification System sound may be difficult for pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehi- cles in the surrounding area to hear:

When there is a lot of noise in the vicinity

When it is raining or during strong winds

When in the area surrounding the rear of the vehicle, rather than in front of the vehicle

Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal

Contact your Toyota dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and dis- posal. Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.

35

1

1-1. Hybrid system

B efore driving

Hybrid system precautions

Air conditioning compressor

Power control unit with DC/ DC converter

High voltage cables (orange)

Hybrid battery (traction bat- tery)

Service plug

Electric motor (traction motor)

Caution label

Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a high

voltage system (about 650V at maximum) as well as parts that

become extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey

the caution labels attached to the vehicle.

36

1-1. Hybrid system

Hybrid battery air vent

There is an air intake vent beside the rear left seat for the purpose of cooling the hybrid battery (traction battery). If the vent becomes blocked, the hybrid battery may overheat, leading to a reduction in hybrid battery out- put.

Emergency shut off system

When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emergency shut off system blocks off the high voltage current and stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact your Toyota dealer.

Hybrid warning message

A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.

If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. (P. 500)

37

1-1. Hybrid system

1

B efore driving

If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12- volt battery has been disconnected

The hybrid system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If the READY indicator does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.

Running out of fuel

When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light (P. 493) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not be able to start. (The minimum amount of fuel to add to make the low fuel level warning light go out is about 3.0 gal. [11.3 L, 2.5 Imp. gal.] when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope.)

Electromagnetic waves

High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles incorporate electro- magnetic shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances.

Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio parts.

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving style and driving conditions.

38

1-1. Hybrid system

CAUTION

High voltage precautions

The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt sys- tem. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury.

Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables or their connectors.

The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey the caution labels attached to the vehicle.

Never try to open the service plug access hole located in the luggage compartment. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is serviced and is subject to high voltage.

39

1-1. Hybrid system

1

B efore driving

CAUTION

Road accident cautions

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:

Pull your vehicle off the road, shift the shift lever to P, apply the parking brake, and turn the hybrid system off.

Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables or connectors.

If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.

If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or, if possible, boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.

If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small amount of water may be dangerous.

If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with the front wheels raised. If the wheels connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause a fire. (P. 485)

Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as possible.

Nickel-metal hydride battery

Your vehicle contains a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery. If disposed of improperly, it is hazardous to the environment and there is a risk of severe burns and electrical shock that may result in death or serious injury.

Emergency shut off system

Carefully check to see if there are exposed high voltage parts or cables. Never touch the parts or cables. (P. 35)

Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as possible.

40

1-1. Hybrid system

NOTICE

Hybrid battery air vent

Do not place foreign objects over or in front of the air vent. The hybrid bat- tery (traction battery) may overheat and be damaged.

Clean the air vent regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from overheating.

Do not wet the air vent as this may cause a short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery).

Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged.

41

1

1-1. Hybrid system

B efore driving

Energy monitor/consumption screen

Energy monitor

Audio system with CAR button

Press CAR.

If the Trip Information or Past Record screen is displayed, touch Energy.

You can view the status of your hybrid system on the multi-informa-

tion display and the audio system.

Audio system

Multi-information display

42

1-1. Hybrid system

Audio system with APPS button

Press APPS.

Select Eco.

If the Trip Information or Past Record screen is displayed, touch Energy.

Multi-information display

Push the DISP switch on the steering wheel several times to select the energy monitor dis- play. (P. 185)

STEP 1

STEP 2

Audio system Multi-information

display

When the vehi- cle is powered by the electric motor (traction motor)

43

1-1. Hybrid system

1

B efore driving

When the vehi- cle is powered by the gasoline engine

When the vehi- cle is powered by both the gas- oline engine and the electric motor (traction motor)

When the vehi- cle is charging the hybrid bat- tery (traction battery)

When there is no energy flow

Audio system Multi-information

display

44

1-1. Hybrid system

The image is example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

Trip Information screen

Audio system with CAR button

Display the Trip Information screen. (P. 41)

If the Energy Monitor or Past Record screen is displayed, touch Trip Information.

Audio system with APPS button

Display the Trip Information screen. (P. 42)

If Energy Monitor screen is displayed, touch Fuel Consumption.

If Past Record screen is displayed, touch Trip Information.

Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes

Displays the average vehicle speed since the hybrid system was started.

Displays the elapsed time since the hybrid system was started.

Cruising range

Regenerated energy in the past 15 minutes

One symbol indicates 30 Wh. Up to 5 symbols are shown.

The image is example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

Hybrid battery (traction bat- tery) status

Low Full Low Full

Audio system Multi-information

display

45

1-1. Hybrid system

1

B efore driving

Past record screen

Audio system with CAR button

Display the Past Record screen. (P. 41)

If the Energy Monitor or Trip Information screen is displayed, touch Past Record.

Audio system with APPS button

Display the Past Record screen. (P. 42)

If Energy Monitor screen is displayed, touch Fuel Consumption.

If Trip Information screen is displayed, touch Past Record.

Best past fuel consumption

Update

The average fuel consumption and graph are updated, and a new average fuel consumption record begins.

Average fuel consumption

Displays a maximum of five past record of the average fuel con- sumption.

Previous fuel consumption record

The image is example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

Resetting the consumption data

Selecting Clear on the Trip Information screen will reset the fuel con- sumption and the regenerated energy for the past 15 minutes. Selecting Clear on the Past Record screen will reset the past records and best past fuel consumption. Selecting Yes on the following screen will confirm reset- ting of all the data.

46

1-1. Hybrid system

Hybrid vehicle driving tips

For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following

points:

Using Eco drive mode

(P. 169)

Use of the Hybrid System Indicator

More Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the Hybrid System Indicator needle within the Eco area.

When braking the vehicle

Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in good time. A greater amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down.

Delays

Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic lights, will lead to bad fuel consumption. Check traffic reports before leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When encountering a delay, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move for- ward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption.

Highway driving

Control your speed and keep at a constant speed. Also, before stop- ping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the acceler- ator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down.

Air conditioning

Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help con- trol excessive gasoline consumption. In summer: In high temperatures, use the recirculated air mode. Doing so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioning and reduce fuel consumption as well. In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out until the gasoline engine and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of the heater.

47

1-1. Hybrid system

1

B efore driving

Checking tire inflation pressure

Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire inflation pressure can cause poor fuel consumption. Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry roads can lead to poor fuel consumption. Use a tire that is appropriate for the season.

Luggage

Carrying heavy luggage can lead to poor fuel consumption. Avoid car- rying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack can also cause poor fuel consumption.

Warming up before driving

Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driv- ing short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which can lead to poor fuel consumption.

48

1-2. Key information

Keys

Using the mechanical key

To take out the mechanical key, push the release button and take the key out.

The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it.

After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (P. 535)

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Electronic keys

Operating the smart key

system (P. 51)

Operating the wireless

remote control function

(P. 64)

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

49

1-2. Key information

1

B efore driving

When required to leave the vehicles key with a parking attendant

Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 368)

Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.

Key number plate

Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Toyota dealer using the key number plate. (P. 534)

When riding in an aircraft

When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

NOTICE

To prevent key damage

Observe the following:

Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.

Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.

Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.

Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials.

Do not disassemble the keys.

Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the key.

Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equip- ment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.

50

1-2. Key information

NOTICE

Carrying the electronic key on your person

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appli- ances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.

In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related prob- lems

Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

When a vehicle key is lost

If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was provided with your vehicle.

51

1

B efore driving

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart key system

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the

electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.

(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)

Unlocks and locks the doors (P. 52)

Unlocks the trunk (P. 52)

Starts the hybrid system (P. 157)

Electronic key

Electronic key Electronic key

52

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Unlocking and locking the doors (front door handles only)

Grip the drivers door handle to unlock the door. Grip the passen- gers door handle to unlock all the doors.*

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.

*: The door unlock settings can be changed. (P. 56)

Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the side of the door handle) to lock the doors.

Unlocking the trunk

Press the button to unlock the trunk.

53

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

B efore driving

Antenna location and effective range

Antenna location

Antennas outside the cabin

Antenna outside the trunk

Antenna inside the trunk

Antennas inside the cabin

54

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of either of the frontoutside door handles. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)

When unlocking the trunk

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release button.

When starting the hybrid system or changing POWER switch modes

The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

55

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

B efore driving

When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor

Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages shown on the multi-information display is used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate mea- sures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display. (P. 510)

The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded.

Use your palm to touch the lock sensor.

Alarm Situation Correction procedure

Exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds

The trunk was closed while the electronic key was still inside the trunk and all the doors were locked.

Retrieve the elec- tronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid.

An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.

Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.

Interior alarm sounds continu- ously

The POWER switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the drivers door was open (or the drivers door was opened while the POWER switch was in ACCESSORY mode).

Turn the POWER switch off and close the drivers door.

56

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. (How- ever, depending on the location of the electronic key, the key may be detected as being in the vehicle. In this case, vehicle may be unlocked.)

Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.

Turn the POWER switch off.

When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and

hold , , or for about 5 seconds while pressing and

holding .

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)

Vehicles with an alarm system: To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If a door is not

opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked

again and the alarm will automatically be set.) In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 108)

STEP 1

STEP 2

Multi-information display

Unlocking doors Beep

Holding the driver's door handle unlocks only the driver's door. Exterior: Beeps 3

times Interior: Beeps onceHolding the front passen-

gers door handle unlocks all the doors.

Holding either front door handle unlocks all the doors.

Exterior: Beeps twice Interior: Beeps once

57

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

B efore driving

Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the elec- tronic key battery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time.

In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to unlock the doors.

The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.

The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.

If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the drivers door. In this case, take hold of the drivers door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function

When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from emitting radio waves.

Press twice while pressing and

holding . Confirm that the electronic

key indicator flashes 4 times.

While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart key system cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the elec- tronic key buttons.

58

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Conditions affecting operation

The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping: P. 535)

When the electronic key battery is depleted

Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis- play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri- cal noise

When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects

Cards to which aluminum foil is attached Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside Metallic wallets or bags Coins Hand warmers made of metal Media such as CDs and DVDs

When other wireless key (that emit radio waves) is being used nearby

When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves

A portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless com- munication device

Another vehicles electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves

Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs) Digital audio players Portable game systems

If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window

When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices

59

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

B efore driving

Notes for the entry function

Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:

The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.

The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.

The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is started or POWER switch modes are changed.

Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.

As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone.

Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the hybrid system if the electronic key is near the window.

The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The door will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.

If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec- tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.

60

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Notes for locking the doors

Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.

When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recogni- tion signals will be given.

If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (P. 57)

If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.

The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again.

Notes for the unlocking function

A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.

Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door. Remove the gloves and touch the sensor on the back of the handle again.

If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (P. 57)

If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.

61

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

B efore driving

When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.

The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. (P. 576)

Alarm (if equipped)

Using the smart key system to lock the doors will set the alarm system. (P. 108)

To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)

If the smart key system does not operate properly

Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 535)

Starting the hybrid system:P. 535

Electronic key battery depletion

The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.

If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the hybrid system stops. (P. 510)

As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 458)

The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate. The detection area becomes smaller. The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.

62

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:

TVs Personal computers Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones Glass top ranges Table lamps

When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 458

If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting

Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 64, 535)

Starting the hybrid system and changing POWER switch modes: P. 536

Stopping the hybrid system: P. 157

Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

Settings (e. g. smart key system) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 576)

Certification for the smart key system

U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-4

FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-5

FCC ID: HYQ23AAB

FCC ID: HYQ14FBA

NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

63

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

B efore driving

Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ- ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION

Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should main- tain a reasonable distance between themselves and the smart key system antennas. (P. 53) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.

Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implant- able cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Ask your Toyota dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

64

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Wireless remote control

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-

cle.

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

Pressing the button unlocks the drivers door. Pressing the button again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors.

Opens the drivers window and moon roof (press and hold)* Unlocks the trunk (press and hold)

Sounds the alarm (press and hold)

*: This setting must be custom-

ized at your Toyota dealer.

65

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

B efore driving

Operation signals

Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.

Drivers window and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the drivers window and moon roof are opening.

Door lock buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

Panic mode

Security feature

P. 56

Alarm (if equipped)

Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system. (P. 108)

Conditions affecting operation

P. 58

If the wireless remote control does not operate properly

Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 535)

Electronic key battery depletion

P. 61

When is pressed for longer

than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.

66

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 458

Confirmation of the registered key number

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.

Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 576)

Certification for wireless remote control

U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-4

FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-5

FCC ID: HYQ23AAB

FCC ID: HYQ14FBA

NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ- ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

67

1

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

B efore driving

Doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,

wireless remote control or door lock switch.

Entry function

P. 51

Wireless remote control

P. 64

Door lock switch

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

Inside lock button

Unlocks the door

Locks the door

The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.

68

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Locking the doors from the outside without a key

Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

Close the door.

The door cannot be locked if the POWER switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.

The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

Rear door child-protector lock

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

Unlock

Lock

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.

STEP 1

STEP 2

69

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

B efore driving

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or cancelled:

Setting and canceling the functions

The automatic door locking and unlocking functions can be set or canceled on the audio system screen (P. 576) or by following the procedure below.

Close all the doors and turn the POWER switch to ON mode. (Perform step 2 within 10 seconds.)

Shift the shift lever to P or N, and press and hold the driver's door lock switch ( or ) for approximately 5 seconds and then release.

The shift lever and switch posi- tions corresponding to the desired function to be set are shown in the following table.

Use the same procedure to can- cel the function.

Function Operation

Shift position linked door locking function

Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors.

Shift position linked door unlocking function

Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all the doors.

Speed linked door lock- ing function

All the doors are locked when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

Driver's door linked door unlocking function

All the doors are unlocked when the driver's door is opened within 10 seconds after turning the POWER switch off.

STEP 1

STEP 2

70

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all the doors are locked and then unlocked.

Function Shift lever position

Drivers door lock switch position

Shift position linked door lock- ing function

P Shift position linked door unlocking function

Speed linked door locking func- tion

N Driver's door linked door unlocking function

Using the mechanical key

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 535)

If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.

If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting

Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 64, 535)

Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 576)

71

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

B efore driving

CAUTION

To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury.

Always use a seat belt.

Always lock all the doors.

Ensure that all doors are properly closed.

Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving. The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi- cle and it may result in serious injury or death.

Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.

Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.

72

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Trunk

The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or

wireless remote control.

Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle

Pull up the lever to release the trunk lid.

Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle

Entry function

P. 51

Wireless remote control

P. 64

73

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

B efore driving

Trunk light

The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.

Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside

When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm. In this case, the trunk lid can be opened using the entry function.

Even when the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key confinement prevention function can be activated so the trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.

Even when the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors are locked, the key may not be detected depending on the places and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement pre- vention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing the trunk.

The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.

Internal trunk release lever

The trunk lid can be opened by pulling up the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of the trunk lid.

The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed.

74

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug- gage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident. In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri- ous health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.

Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, caus- ing an accident.

Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a colli- sion, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

When children are in the vehicle

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Do not allow children to play in the trunk. If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could suffer from heat exhaustion, suffocation or other injuries.

Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid. Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the childs hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.

75

1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

B efore driving

CAUTION

Using the trunk

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in seri- ous injury.

Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.

If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close.

Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.

Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the trunk lid on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.

When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.

When closing the trunk lid, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface.

76

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats

Manual seat

Seat position adjustment lever

Seatback angle adjustment lever

Vertical height adjustment lever (drivers side only)

77

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

1

B efore driving

Power seat

Seat position adjustment switch

Seatback angle adjustment switch

Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch (drivers side only)

Vertical height adjustment switch (drivers side only)

Lumbar support adjustment switch (drivers side only)

78

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION

Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect- edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.

79

1

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

B efore driving

Rear seats

Folding down the rear seatback

Pull the seatback lever in the trunk.

The seatback of the right side rear seat can be folded down.

80

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION

When folding the rear seatback down

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Do not fold the seatback down while driving.

Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.

Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the trunk while driv- ing.

Do not allow children to enter the trunk.

When returning the seat to its original position

Ensure that the seat belt does not get caught between or behind the seats.

If the seat belt has been released from its guide, pass the seat belt through its guide. (P. 86)

Seat adjustment

Be careful not to get hands or feet pinched between the rear console box and the rear seat when folding down the rear seatback.

After returning the seatback to the upright position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pressing it forward and rear- ward on the top.

Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught in the seatback.

Make sure that the seat belt is passing through its guide.

81

1

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

B efore driving

Head restraints

Removing the head restraints (front seats)

Installing the head restraints (front seats)

Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Vertical adjustment (front seats)

Up

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button.

Lock release

button

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button.

Align the head restraint with the installa- tion holes and push it down to the lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

82

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Adjusting the height of the head restraints (front seats)

CAUTION

Head restraint precautions (front seat)

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.

Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

83

1

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

B efore driving

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-

ing the vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts

Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoul- der.

Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

Do not twist the seat belt.

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard.

To release the seat belt, press the release button.

Release button

84

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occu- pant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision.

The pretensioner may not acti- vate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact, a rear impact or a vehicle rollover.

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)

Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release button.

Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up.

Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

85

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

1

B efore driving

Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 135)

Pregnant women

People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 83)

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 83)

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occu- pants. Extend the shoulder belt com- pletely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

86

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 131)

When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 83 regarding seat belt usage.

Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli- sions.

Seat belt extender

Rear seat belt

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.

Use the seat belt after passing it through the guide if the seat belt comes free from the guide.

87

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

1

B efore driving

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

Wearing a seat belt

Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

Always wear a seat belt properly.

Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.

Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a childs neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

Seat belt pretensioners

Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.

If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.

88

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION

Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (P. 84)

Seat belt damage and wear

Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.

Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

Always make sure the shoulder belt passes through the guide when using the seat belt. Failure to properly position the belt may reduce the amount of protection in an accident and could lead to death or serious injury in a collision or sudden stop.

Always make sure that the seat belt is not twisted, does not get caught in the guide or the seatback and is arranged in the proper position.

89

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

1

B efore driving

CAUTION

Using a seat belt extender

Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increas- ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

NOTICE

When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

90

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Steering wheel

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci- dent, resulting in death or serious injury.

After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

Hold the steering wheel and push the lever down.

Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.

STEP 1

STEP 2

91

1

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

B efore driving

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by

using the following functions:

Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Normal position

Anti-glare position

Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror

In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and the reflected light is automatically reduced.

Turns automatic mode on/off

The indicator comes on when automatic mode is turned on.

The mirror will revert to auto- matic mode each time the POWER switch is turned to ON mode.

92

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

To ensure that the sensors operate prop- erly, do not touch or cover them.

93

1

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

B efore driving

Outside rear view mirrors

Folding the mirrors

Push the mirror back in the direc- tion of the vehicle's rear.

Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.

To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch.

Left

Right

To adjust the mirror, press the switch.

Up

Right

Down

Left

STEP 1

STEP 2

94

1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The POWER switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with mirror defoggers)

Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 248)

CAUTION

When driving the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while driving. Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.

When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with mirror defog- gers)

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

95

1

B efore driving

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows

Window lock switch

Press the switch down to lock the passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent chil- dren from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

Closing

One-touch closing (drivers window only)* Opening

One-touch opening (drivers window only)*

*: To stop the window partway, operate the switch in the oppo- site direction.

96

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

The power windows can be operated when

The POWER switch is in ON mode.

Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the POWER switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

Jam protection function (drivers window only)

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

When the power window does not close normally (drivers window only)

If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the drivers door.

After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the POWER switch is turned to ON mode.

If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation explained above, initialize the function by performing the following proce- dure.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the win- dow has closed.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the win- dow has opened completely.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has closed.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.

If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after perform- ing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

97

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

1

B efore driving

Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

Settings (e.g. key linked operation) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 576)

CAUTION

Closing the windows

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

Do not allow children to operate the power windows. Closing a power window on someone can cause death or serious injury. The driver is responsible for instructing children not to operate the power windows.

Jam protection function (drivers window only)

Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.

98

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Moon roof

Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt

it up and down.

Opening and closing

Opens the moon roof*

The moon roof stops slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise.

Press the switch again to fully open the moon roof.

Closes the moon roof*

*: Lightly press the switch in either direction to stop the moon roof partway.

Tilt up and down

Tilts the moon roof up*

Tilts the moon roof down*

*: Lightly press either of the moon roof switches to stop the moon roof partway.

: If equipped

99

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

1

B efore driving

The moon roof can be operated when

The POWER switch is in ON mode.

Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the POWER switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

100

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

When the moon roof does not close normally

Perform the following procedure:

If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the CLOSE switch.*1

The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approxi- mately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the UP switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up position and stops.

Release the UP switch once and then press and hold the UP switch again.*1

The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.

*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the open/close switch in the close position or press and hold the UP switch. The moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above proce- dure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

101

1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

1

B efore driving

Moon roof open reminder function

The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the POWER switch is turned off and the driver's door is opened with the moon roof open.

Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

Settings (e.g. key linked operation) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 576)

CAUTION

Opening the moon roof

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi- cle while it is moving.

Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

Closing the moon roof

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bod- ies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

Do not allow children to operate the moon roof. Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury. The driver is responsible for instructing children not to operate the moon roof.

Jam protection function

Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.

102

1-6. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehicle

Turn the POWER switch off and close all the doors and win- dows.

Opening the fuel tank cap

Pull up the opener to open the fuel filler door.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.

Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

103

1-6. Refueling

1

B efore driving

Closing the fuel tank cap

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

104

1-6. Refueling

CAUTION

When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.

Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.

Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

When refueling

Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck. If fuel is added with the nozzle slightly lifted away from the fuel filler neck, the automatic shut off function may not operate, resulting in fuel overflowing from the tank.

When replacing the fuel cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

105

1-6. Refueling

1

B efore driving

NOTICE

Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling. Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.

106

1-7. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.

Conditions affecting operation

Depending on the surrounding environment and conditions, the immobilizer system may not operate properly. This may prevent the hybrid system from starting. (P. 58)

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the

hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously regis-

tered in the vehicle's on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not

guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

The indicator light flashes after the POWER switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flash- ing after the POWER switch has been turned to ACCES- SORY or ON mode to indicate that the system has been can- celed.

107

1-7. Theft deterrent system

1

B efore driving

Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ- ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION

Certifications for the immobilizer system

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE

To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

108

1-7. Theft deterrent system

Alarm

: If equipped

The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forced

entry is detected.

Triggering of the alarm

The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:

A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key.

The hood is opened.

Some models: The window is tapped or broken.

Setting the alarm system

Close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock all the doors. The system will be set auto- matically after 30 seconds.

The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.

Deactivating or stopping the alarm

Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.

Unlock the doors or trunk. If the alarm does not stop even when the wireless remote control is operated, repeat the oper- ation until the alarm stops.

Turn the POWER switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode, or start the hybrid system. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

109

1-7. Theft deterrent system

1

B efore driving

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.

Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following:

Nobody is in the vehicle.

The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.

No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.

Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations. (Stopping the alarm deactivates the system.)

Alarm-operated door lock

When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to pre- vent intruders.

Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery.

A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood.

The 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked.

110

1-7. Theft deterrent system

NOTICE

To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

111

1

B efore driving

1-8. Safety information

Correct driving posture

Drive in a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in the seat. (P. 76)

Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (P. 76)

Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily oper- able.

Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the air- bag is facing your chest. (P. 90)

Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (P. 81)

Wear the seat belt correctly. (P. 83)

112

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION

While driving

Do not adjust the position of the drivers seat. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.

Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci- dent, resulting in death or serious injury. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

Adjusting the seat position

Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen- gers are not injured by the moving seat.

Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

113

1

1-8. Safety information

B efore driving

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain

types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the

occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the

risk of death or serious injury.

SRS front airbags

SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas- senger from impact with interior components

SRS knee airbags Can help provide driver and front passenger protection

SRS side and curtain shield airbags

SRS front side airbags Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

SRS rear side airbags Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats

114

1-8. Safety information

SRS airbag system components

Front impact sensors

Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)

Knee airbag

Side impact sensors (front door)

Side impact sensors (front)

Front passenger airbag

Front side airbags

Curtain shield airbags

Rear side airbags

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

SRS warning light

Front passengers seat belt buckle switch

Airbag sensor assembly

Side impact sensors (rear)

Driver airbag

Drivers seat belt buckle switch

Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters

SRS curtain shield airbags Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats

115

1-8. Safety information

1

B efore driving

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on infor- mation obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system compo- nents diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

116

1-8. Safety information

If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating) SRS airbag.

A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

The windshield may crack.

For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emer- gency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicles location (without needing to push the SOS button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assis- tance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (P. 402)

SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags/SRS curtain shield airbags)

The SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal col- lision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle and sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle underrides, or goes under, the bed of a truck etc.).

Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.

The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 125)

117

1-8. Safety information

1

B efore driving

SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield air- bags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corre- sponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpen- dicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.

Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front air- bags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

Landing hard or falling

Collision from the side

Collision from the rear

Vehicle rollover

118

1-8. Safety information

Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

SRS side airbags: Do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a fron- tal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side colli- sion.

SRS curtain shield airbags: Do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side colli- sion.

Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger com- partment

Collision from the side at an angle

Collision from the front*

Collision from the rear

Vehicle rollover

*: Depending on the conditions and type of accident, the curtain shield airbags may deploy (inflate) upon frontal impact.

119

1-8. Safety information

1

B efore driving

When to contact your Toyota dealer

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an acci- dent that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags to inflate.

A portion of a door is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side and cur- tain shield airbags to inflate.

The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger air- bag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or other- wise damaged.

The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or other- wise damaged.

The portion of the front pillars, rear pil- lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or other- wise damaged.

120

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION

SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:

Since the risk zone for the drivers airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag pro- vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, sim- ply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air- bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

121

1-8. Safety information

1

B efore driving

CAUTION

SRS airbag precautions

The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air- bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys- tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 131)

If the seat belt extender has been con- nected to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passen- ger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been con- nected. In this case, the SRS front air- bags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

122

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION

SRS airbag precautions

Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.

Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.

Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pil- lars.

Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seats toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

Do not attach anything to or lean any- thing against areas such as the dash- board, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.

123

1-8. Safety information

1

B efore driving

CAUTION

SRS airbag precautions

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.

If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.

Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air- bag components. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air- bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield glass, side door glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.

124

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION

SRS airbag precautions

If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.

Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags

Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails

Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment

Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches

Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system

Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players

Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

125

1

1-8. Safety information

B efore driving

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system. This system detects the conditions of the front passen-

ger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front

passenger.

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

AIR BAG OFF indicator light

AIR BAG ON indicator light

126

1-8. Safety information

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Adult*1

Child*4

Indicator/ warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

AIR BAG ON

SRS warning light Off

Seat belt reminder light Off*2 or

flashing*3

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Activated

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Front passengers seat belt pretensioner

Indicator/ warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

AIR BAG OFF or

AIR BAG ON*4

SRS warning light Off

Seat belt reminder light Off*2 or

flashing*3

Devices

Front passenger airbag Deactivated

or activated*4

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Activated Curtain shield airbag in the front

passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated

or activated*4

Front passengers seat belt pretensioner Activated

127

1-8. Safety information

1

B efore driving

Child restraint system with infant*5

Unoccupied

Indicator/ warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

AIR BAG OFF*6

SRS warning light Off

Seat belt reminder light Off*2 or

flashing*3

Devices

Front passenger airbag Deactivated

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Activated Curtain shield airbag in the front

passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated

Front passengers seat belt pretensioner Activated

Indicator/ warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

AIR BAG OFF

SRS warning light Off

Seat belt reminder light

Devices

Front passenger airbag Deactivated

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Activated Curtain shield airbag in the front

passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated

Front passengers seat belt pretensioner Activated

128

1-8. Safety information

There is a malfunction in the system

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.

*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.

*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

*4: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or pos- ture.

*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front pas- senger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 131)

*6: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. (P. 135)

Indicator/ warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

AIR BAG OFF

SRS warning light On

Seat belt reminder light

Devices

Front passenger airbag Deactivated

Side airbag on the front passenger seats

Activated Curtain shield airbag in the front

passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated

Front passengers seat belt pretensioner Activated

129

1-8. Safety information

1

B efore driving

CAUTION

Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

Wear the seat belt properly.

Make sure the front passengers seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

Make sure the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illumi- nated, the SRS airbags for the passenger may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.

Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment.

Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.

Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the AIR BAG OFF indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passengers airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seat- back to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

130

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION

Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.

When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front pas- senger seat in the proper order. (P. 135)

Do not modify or remove the front seats.

Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Other- wise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.

Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that cov- ers the seat cushion surface.

Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

131

1

1-8. Safety information

B efore driving

Child restraint systems

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.

Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.

For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system. General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 135)

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be prop-

erly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder

belt.

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the

use of child restraint systems.

132

1-8. Safety information

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child:

Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat

Forward facing Convertible seat

Booster seat

133

1-8. Safety information

1

B efore driving

Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicles seat belt.

If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 83)

CAUTION

Child restraint precautions

For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.

Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con- forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci- dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front pas- senger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illumi- nated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

134

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION

Child restraint precautions

Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or seri- ous injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.

When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a childs neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

When the child restraint system is not in use

Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger com- partment.

If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

135

1

1-8. Safety information

B efore driving

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly

secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a

seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is

not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-

dren) system.

Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the outer rear seats. (But- tons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)

Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mecha- nism (ALR/ELR belts except drivers seat belt) (P. 83)

Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)

An anchor bracket is provided for each rear seat.

136

1-8. Safety information

Installation with LATCH system

Type A

Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.

Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

STEP 1

Canada only

STEP 2

137

1-8. Safety information

1

B efore driving

Type B

Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.

Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

STEP 1

Canada only

STEP 2

138

1-8. Safety information

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat

Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

139

1-8. Safety information

1

B efore driving

While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

Forward facing Convertible seat

Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

140

1-8. Safety information

While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 141)

Booster seat

Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer's instruc- tions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (P. 83)

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 1

STEP 2

141

1-8. Safety information

1

B efore driving

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap

Secure the child restraint using the seat belt or LATCH anchors.

Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

STEP 1

STEP 2

142

1-8. Safety information

Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifica- tions can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819.

CAUTION

When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 85)

143

1-8. Safety information

1

B efore driving

CAUTION

When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place. If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

If the driver's seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right- hand rear seat.

Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

Only put a forward-facing child restraint system on the front seat when unavoid- able. When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front pas- senger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

144

1-8. Safety information

CAUTION

When installing a child restraint system

When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

Push and pull the child restraint system from side to side and forward to be sure it is secure.

After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sud- den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerve or an accident.

When driving 2

145

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle............ 146

Power (ignition) switch ..... 157

EV drive mode ................. 165

Hybrid transmission ......... 168

Turn signal lever .............. 170

Parking brake................... 172

Horn ................................. 173

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters............. 174

Indicators and warning lights .............................. 180

Multi-information display............................ 185

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch............... 192

Fog light switch ................ 198

Windshield wipers and washer .................... 200

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control................... 204

Driving assist systems ..... 207

Hill-start assist control ...... 212

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ....... 214

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage .......... 224

Vehicle load limits ............ 228

Winter driving tips ............ 229

Trailer towing ................... 233

Dinghy towing .................. 234

146

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-

ing:

Starting the hybrid system

P. 157

Driving

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P. 168)

Release the parking brake. (P. 172)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Stopping

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P. (P. 168)

Parking the vehicle

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake. (P. 172)

Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 168)

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

Press the POWER switch to stop the hybrid system.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

147

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W h

en drivin g

Starting off on a steep uphill

Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Release the parking brake.

Driving in the rain

Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.

Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It dose not indicate sudden acceleration.

The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill

When the accelerator pedal is released

Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is rec- ommended:

For the first 200 miles (300 km): Avoid sudden stops.

For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):

Do not drive at extremely high speeds. Avoid sudden acceleration. Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

148

2-1. Driving procedures

Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or when- ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding down operation.

Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (P. 552)

For efficient use

Shift the shift lever to D when driving. In the N position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated. The hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, requiring unnecessary engine power to recharge.

Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine power.

Avoid repeated acceleration. Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting in poor acceleration. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator pedal slightly released.

Shift the shift lever to P when parking. In the N position, the hybrid battery (traction battery) does not recharge. Leaving the shift lever in the N position for an extended period of time may discharge the hybrid battery. The vehicle cannot run if the hybrid battery is discharged.

When DRIVING FORCE LIMITED is displayed on the multi-informa- tion display

Driving force is being limited. This is not a malfunction.

149

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W h

en drivin g

CAUTION

When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the hybrid sys- tem operating. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

When driving the vehicle

Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel- erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi- culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and acceler- ator pedals properly.

Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result- ing in an accident.

When the hybrid vehicle is driven using the electric motor only, no engine noise is made. As such, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other peo- ple and vehicles in the surrounding area may not realize that the vehicle is approaching. Even with the Vehicle Proximity Notification System active, people may not realize the vehicle is approaching when the surrounding area is noisy and so forth. Therefore, take extra care while driving.

Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving posi- tion, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immedi- ately.

150

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION

Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid system. Engine braking is not available with the hybrid system dis- engaged.

During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. In the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 548

Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 168)

Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents, resulting in death or serious injury.

Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

151

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W h

en drivin g

CAUTION

Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit per- mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high- speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

When driving on slippery road surfaces

Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.

After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.

When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indica- tors)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

152

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION

When the vehicle is stopped

Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily. If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.

Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the READY indicator is on. Apply the parking brake as necessary.

If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

Avoid revving or racing the engine. Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.

153

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W h

en drivin g

CAUTION

When the vehicle is parked

Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following:

Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.

Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi- cle's electrical components.

Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehi- cle.

Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the hybrid system and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the hybrid system is operating.

Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the hybrid system is operating or immediately after turning the hybrid system off. Doing so may cause burns.

Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehi- cle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

154

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION

Exhaust gases

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the hybrid system. In a closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.

When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

155

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W h

en drivin g

CAUTION

When braking

When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

If the electronically controlled brake system does not operate, do not fol- low other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require brak- ing. In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

The brake system consists of 2 or more individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other(s) will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

NOTICE

When driving the vehicle

Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain driving torque.

Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

When parking the vehicle

Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is acci- dentally depressed.

156

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE

Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down and stop the vehicle in a safe place.

It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.

The vehicle will behave abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 519)

When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

Engine stalling

Short in electrical components

Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:

Brake function

Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, hybrid transmission, etc.

Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possi- ble), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

157

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W h

en drivin g

Power (ignition) switch

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic

key on your person starts the hybrid system or changes POWER

switch modes.

Starting the hybrid system

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

If the shift lever is not set in P, the hybrid system may not be started. (P. 168)

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

will be displayed on the multi-information display.

If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started.

Press the POWER switch.

After a while, the READY indicator comes on with a beep sound.

The vehicle can move when the READY indicator is on even if the engine is stopped.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until the hybrid system is completely started.

The hybrid system can be started from any POWER switch mode.

Check that the READY indicator is on.

The vehicle will not move when the READY indicator is off.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

158

2-1. Driving procedures

Stopping the hybrid system

Stop the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Set the parking brake. (P. 172)

Release the brake pedal.

Press the POWER switch.

Check that on the multi-information display is off.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

159

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W h

en drivin g

Changing POWER switch modes

Modes can be changed by pressing the POWER switch with brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)

Off*

The emergency flashers can be used.

The multi-information display will not be displayed.

ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

will be displayed on

the multi-information display.

ON mode

All electrical components can be used.

will be displayed on

the multi-information display.

*: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the hybrid system, the POWER switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.

160

2-1. Driving procedures

When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a position other than P

If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the POWER switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:

Check that the parking brake is set.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Check that is displayed on the multi-information dis-

play and then press the POWER switch once.

Check that on the multi-information display is off.

Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the POWER switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the POWER switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long peri- ods of time when the hybrid system is not operating.

Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

P. 34

Electronic key battery depletion

P. 61

When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions

It may take time until the READY indicator comes on.

Conditions affecting operation

P. 58

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

161

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W h

en drivin g

Note for the entry function

P. 59

If the hybrid system does not start

The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 106)

Steering lock

After turning the POWER switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the POWER switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.

When the steering lock cannot be released

Steering lock motor overheating prevention

To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be sus- pended if the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the hybrid system. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.

When CHECK SMART KEY SYSTEM will be displayed on the multi- information display.

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The hybrid system may not start if the shift lever is displaced out of P. SHIFT TO P POSITION TO START will be displayed on the multi-informa- tion display.

STEERING LOCK ACTIVE will be dis- played on the multi-information display.

Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the POWER switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

162

2-1. Driving procedures

If the READY indicator does not come on

If the READY indicator does not come on when you press the POWER switch with the shift lever in P and the brake pedal depressed, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

If the hybrid system is malfunctioning

P. 501

If the electronic key battery is depleted

P. 458

Operation of the POWER switch

When operating the POWER switch, one short, firm press is enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the hybrid system may not start or the POWER switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.

If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the POWER switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases. After turning the POWER switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the hybrid system.

If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting

P. 536

163

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W h

en drivin g

CAUTION

When starting the hybrid system

Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the drivers seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any cir- cumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Caution while driving

If hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activa- tion of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, result- ing in death or serious injury.

Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency

If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehi- cle, press and hold the POWER switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 548)

However, do not touch the POWER switch while driving except in an emer- gency. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

164

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the POWER switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time without the hybrid system on.

If is displayed on the multi-information display, the POWER

switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the POWER switch off.

Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the POWER switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCES- SORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery discharge may occur.

When starting the hybrid system

Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.

Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the POWER switch

If the POWER switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Con- tact your Toyota dealer immediately.

165

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W h

en drivin g

EV drive mode

In EV drive mode the electric motor (traction motor), powered by the

hybrid battery (traction battery), is used to drive the vehicle.

This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morn-

ing and late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern

for noises and gas emissions.

However, when the Vehicle Proximity Notification System is active,

the vehicle may produce sound.

Turns EV drive mode on/off

When EV drive mode is turned on, the EV drive mode indica- tor will come on. Pressing the switch when in EV drive mode will return the vehicle to normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [trac- tion motor]).

166

2-1. Driving procedures

Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold

If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine will start automatically after a short period of time in order to warm up. In this case, you will become unable to switch to EV drive mode. After the hybrid system has started and the READY indicator has illumi- nated, press the EV drive mode switch before the gasoline engine starts to switch to EV drive mode.

Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on

It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display.

The temperature of the hybrid system is high. The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.

The temperature of the hybrid system is low. The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 68F (20C) for a long period of time etc.

The gasoline engine is warming up.

The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low. The remaining battery level indicated in the Energy Monitor display is low. (P. 41)

Vehicle speed is about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.

The windshield defogger is in use.

167

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W h

en drivin g

Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode

When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound and the EV drive mode indicator will flash and go off.

The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low. The remaining battery level indicated in the Energy Monitor display is low. (P. 41)

Vehicle speed becomes more than about 25 mph (40 km/h).

The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.

Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode

EV drive modes possible driving distance ranges from a few hundred yards (a few hundred meters) to approximately 1.3 miles (2 km). Driving is possible at speeds of less than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). However, depend- ing on vehicle conditions, there are situations when EV drive mode cannot be used. (The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level and driving conditions.)

Fuel economy

Your Toyota is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel econ- omy.

CAUTION

Caution while driving

When driving in EV drive mode no engine noise is made. As such, pedestri- ans, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them. Therefore, take extra care while driving even if the Vehicle Proximity Notifi- cation System is active.

168

2-1. Driving procedures

Hybrid transmission

Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

Shifting the shift lever

While the POWER switch is in ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.

Shift position Purpose

Shift position Function

P Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system

R Reversing

N Neutral

D Normal driving

B Position for engine braking

169

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W h

en drivin g

Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. (P. 238) To improve air conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.

When in heavy traffic

If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged. To help prevent the battery from discharging, avoid putting the shift lever in N for an extended period of time.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

P. 533

CAUTION

When driving on slippery road surfaces

Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly. Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an accident.

Selecting Eco drive mode

When the vehicle is driven in Eco drive mode, vehicle driving force and operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cool- ing) is controlled to improve fuel efficiency.

Eco drive mode

When eco drive mode is turned on, the ECO MODE indicator will come on.

Pressing the ECO MODE switch again turns eco drive mode off.

170

2-1. Driving procedures

Turn signal lever

Turn signals can be operated when

The POWER switch is in ON mode.

If the indicators flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been per- formed

Operate the lever again.

The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions of the driver:

Right turn

Left turn

Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it)

The right hand signals will flash 3 times.

Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it)

The left hand signals will flash 3 times.

171

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W h

en drivin g

To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change

Operate the lever in the opposite direction.

172

2-1. Driving procedures

Parking brake

Usage in winter time

See Winter driving tips for parking brake usage in winter time. (P. 229)

NOTICE

Before driving

Fully release the parking brake. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

To set the parking brake, fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot.

(Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.)

U.S.A. Canada

173

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W h

en drivin g

Horn

After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked. (P. 90)

To sound the horn, press on or

close to the mark.

174

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

Hybrid System Indicator

Displays hybrid system power output and regenerative level.

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

Average fuel consumption meter

Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.

Current fuel consumption gauge

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

Display change button

P. 176

Odometer/trip meter display

P. 176

Multi-information display

P. 185

175

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W h

en drivin g

Engine coolant temperature display/instrument panel light con- trol display

Displays the engine coolant temperature and instrument panel light control.

Outside temperature display

P. 379

Shift position display

Displays the currently selected shift position.

P. 168

Instrument panel light control button

P. 177

176

2-2. Instrument cluster

Changing the odometer/trip meter display

Pressing the button changes the display as follows.

Odometer

Trip meters A and B

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and dis- play different distances independently.

Press and hold the button to reset.

177

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W h

en drivin g

Instrument panel light control button

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

Pressing the button will adjust brightness of the instrument panel lights.

178

2-2. Instrument cluster

The meters and display illuminate when

The POWER switch is in ON mode.

Hybrid System Indicator

By keeping the indicator needle within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driv- ing can be achieved.

Charge area indicates regeneration* status. Regenerated energy will be used to charge the battery.

*: When used in this manual, regeneration refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.

Engine speed

On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc. There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehicle operation and driving conditions are the same.

Power area Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is being exceeded (during full power driving etc.)

Eco area Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.

Hybrid Eco area Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often.

The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various condi- tions.

Charge area Shows that energy is being recovered via the regenerative brake.

179

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W h

en drivin g

The brightness of the instrument panel lights

When the tail lights are turned on, the meters brightness will be reduced slightly unless the meter brightness level adjustment is set to the brightest setting.

If the tail lights are turned on when the surroundings are dark, the meters brightness will reduce slightly. However, when the surroundings are bright, such as during the daytime, the meters brightness will not be reduced even if the tail lights are turned on.

Fuel gauge and odometer/trip meter display remain on mode

After the POWER switch has been turned off, the fuel gauge and odome- ter/trip meter display remain on for 10 minutes, enabling the fuel gauge and odometer/trip meter values to be checked again without having to turn the POWER switch to ON mode. When confirming the gauges and meters, turn the headlight switch to the

position. Press the display change button to change between the

odometer and trip meter displays.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the engine and its components

The engine may be overheating if the rightmost segment of the engine cool- ant temperature display is flashing. In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 542)

180

2-2. Instrument cluster

Indicators and warning lights

The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster, center

panel and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of

the vehicles various systems.

Instrument cluster

Center panel

181

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W h

en drivin g

Outside rear view mirrors (if equipped)

182

2-2. Instrument cluster

Indicators The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicles various systems.

Turn signal indicator (P. 170)

(if equipped)

BSM outside rear view mirror indicators (P. 214)

Headlight high beam indicator (P. 194)

(U.S.A.)

Headlight indicator (P. 192)

Slip indicator (P. 208)

(Canada)

Tail light indicator (P. 192)

VSC OFF indicator (P. 208)

(if equipped)

Front fog light indicator (P. 198)

TRAC OFF indicator (P. 208)

SRS airbag on-off indi- cator (P. 125)

Security indicator (P. 106, 108)

Cruise control indicator (P. 204)

ECO MODE indicator (P. 169)

Cruise control set indi- cator (P. 204)

READY indicator (P. 157)

EV Indicator (P. 32)

EV drive mode indica- tor (P. 165)

*2

*1, 3

*1

*1 *1

Shift position indica- tors (P. 168)

183

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W h

en drivin g

*1: These lights turn on when the POWER switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

*2: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indi- cators illuminate in the following situations:

When the POWER switch is turned to ON mode while the BSM

main switch is set to ON.

When the BSM main switch is set to ON while the POWER

switch is in ON mode.

If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mir- ror indicators will turn off after a few seconds. If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not turn off, there may be a malfunction with the system. If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

*3: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

184

2-2. Instrument cluster

CAUTION

If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS or SRS warning light not come on when you start the hybrid system or remain on even after a few seconds have passed since the hybrid system was started, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicles systems. (P. 490)

*1: These lights turn on when the POWER switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

*2: For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

*3: For vehicles sold in Canada

(red)

(yellow)

*1, 2 *1, 3 *1 *1 *1, 2 *1, 3 *1 *1, 2

*1, 3 *1 *1, 2 *1 *1

*1

185

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W h

en drivin g

Multi-information display

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of

driving-related data.

Trip information (P. 187)

Displays cruising range, fuel consumption and other cruis- ing-related information.

Warning messages (P. 500)

Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicles systems.

186

2-2. Instrument cluster

Display contents

Trip information contents Switching display items

Cruising range/average fuel consumption

Press the DISP button.

Average vehicle speed/ elapsed time

Eco drive level

Energy monitor

Customization

- (off)

187

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W h

en drivin g

Trip information

Cruising range/average fuel consumption

Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.

As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that

displayed.

When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display

may not be updated.

When refueling, turn the POWER switch off. If the vehicle is refueled

without turning the POWER switch off, the display may not be

updated.

Average fuel consumption

Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.

The function can be reset by pressing the DISP button for longer

than 1 second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.

The average fuel consumption meter will also be reset, returning the

needle to the 0 position.

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

Average vehicle speed/elapsed time

Displays the average vehicle speed and elapsed time since the hybrid system was started.

188

2-2. Instrument cluster

Eco drive level

Displays the average fuel consumption and eco drive level since the hybrid system was started.

Even if a different screen has been selected for the multi-information dis- play, when the POWER switch is turned off, the eco drive level is dis- played. This is not a malfunction. When the highest eco drive level has been achieved EXCELLENT! is displayed.

Energy monitor

Displays the status of the hybrid system (P. 41)

Customization

Language, Eco Indicator (current fuel consumption gauge) and EV Indicator settings can be changed. (P. 188)

Customizing vehicle features

It is possible to customize the language, Eco Indicator (current fuel consumption gauge) and EV Indicator settings using the DISP but- ton.

When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a safe place with the shift position in P and the parking brake set.

Language

Press the DISP button to dis- play the setting screen while the vehicle is stopped, and then press and hold the DISP button to display the customize mode screen.

STEP 1

189

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W h

en drivin g

Press the DISP button to select the item to be set, then press and hold the DISP button.

Press the DISP button to select the desired setting, and then press and hold the DISP but- ton.

To go back to the previous screen or exit the customize mode, press the DISP button to select EXIT, and then press and hold the DISP button.

Eco Indicator (current fuel consumption gauge)

Press the DISP button to dis- play the setting screen while the vehicle is stopped, and then press and hold the DISP button to display the customize mode screen.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

190

2-2. Instrument cluster

Press the DISP button to select the item to be set, then press and hold the DISP button.

Press the DISP button to select the desired setting, and then press and hold the DISP but- ton.

When the ECO INDICATOR is set to OFF, the current fuel con- sumption gauge will not be dis- played.

To go back to the previous screen or exit the customize mode, press the DISP button to select EXIT, and then press and hold the DISP button.

EV Indicator

Press the DISP button to dis- play the setting screen while the vehicle is stopped, and then press and hold the DISP button to display the customize mode screen.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

191

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W h

en drivin g

Press the DISP button to select the item to be set, then press and hold the DISP button.

Press the DISP button to select the desired setting, and then press and hold the DISP but- ton.

To go back to the previous screen or exit the customize mode, press the DISP button to select EXIT, and then press and hold the DISP button.

STEP 2

STEP 3

NOTICE

The multi-information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

192

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:

U.S.A.

The headlights, parking

lights, daytime running

lights and so on turn on

and off automatically

(when the POWER

switch is in ON mode).

The side marker, park-

ing, tail, license plate,

daytime running lights

and instrument panel

lights turn on.

The headlights and all

the lights listed above

(except daytime run-

ning lights) turn on.

The daytime running

light turns off.

193

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

2

W h

en drivin g

Canada

The headlights, park- ing lights, daytime run- ning lights and so on turn on and off auto- matically (when the POWER switch is in ON mode).

The side marker, park-

ing, tail, license plate,

daytime running lights

and instrument panel

lights turn on.

The headlights and all

the lights listed above

(except daytime run-

ning lights) turn on.

The daytime running

lights turn on.

194

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

Manual headlight leveling dial (if equipped)

The level of the headlights can be adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle.

Raises the level of the head- lights

Lowers the level of the head- lights

195

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

2

W h

en drivin g

Guide to dial settings

Daytime running light system

To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the hybrid system is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night. U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.

Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

Headlight control sensor

Occupancy and luggage load conditions Dial position

Occupants Luggage load

Driver None 0

Driver and front pas- senger

None 0

All seats occupied None 1

All seats occupied Full luggage loading 2.5

Driver Full luggage loading 4.5

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or any- thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight sys- tem to malfunction.

196

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Automatic light off system

When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 sec- onds after the POWER switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and a door is opened and closed. (The lights turn off immedi-

ately if on the key is pressed twice after all the doors are closed.)

When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the POWER switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and the drivers door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the POWER switch to ON mode, or turn the

light switch off once and then back to or .

If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.

Light reminder buzzer (except when the light switch is in )

A buzzer sounds when the POWER switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.

12-volt battery-saving function

In order to prevent the vehicle 12-volt battery from discharging, if the head- lights and/or tail lights are on when the POWER switch is turned off the 12- volt battery saving function will operate and automatically turn off all the lights after approximately 20 minutes.

When the POWER switch is turned to ON mode, the 12-volt battery-saving function will be disabled.

When any of the following are performed, the 12-volt battery-saving function is canceled once and then reactivated. All the lights will turn off automatically 20 minutes after the 12-volt battery-saving function has been reactivated:

When the headlight switch is operated

When a door is opened or closed

Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

Settings (e.g. Light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 576)

197

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

2

W h

en drivin g

NOTICE

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

198

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Fog light switch

: If equipped

The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving condi-

tions, such as in rain and fog.

U.S.A.

Turns the front fog lights off

Turns the front fog lights on

199

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

2

W h

en drivin g

Fog lights can be used when

The headlights are on in low beam.

Canada

Turns the front fog lights off

Turns the front fog lights on

200

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Windshield wipers and washer

When is selected, the wiper interval can be adjusted for

intermittent operation.

The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.

U.S.A.

Intermittent windshield wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper operation

High speed windshield wiper operation

Temporary operation

Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

201

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

2

W h

en drivin g

Washer/wiper dual opera- tion

The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

Canada

When is selected, the wiper interval can be adjusted for inter-

mittent operation.

The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.

Intermittent windshield wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper operation

High speed windshield wiper operation

Temporary operation

202

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when

The POWER switch is in ON mode.

If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

Washer/wiper dual opera- tion

The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

203

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

2

W h

en drivin g

NOTICE

When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over- heat.

When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

204

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

Indicators

Cruise control switch

Setting the vehicle speed

Press the ON-OFF button to activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will come on.

Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed.

SET indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

205

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W h

en drivin g

Adjusting the set speed

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated.

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased con- tinually until the lever is released.

Canceling and resuming the constant speed control

Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control.

The speed setting is also can- celed when the brakes are applied.

Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control.

Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

206

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control can be set when

The shift lever is in D.

Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.

Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed.

Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.

Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed. At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

Enhanced VSC is activated.

CAUTION

To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the ON-OFF button when not in use.

Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

In heavy traffic

On roads with sharp bends

On winding roads

On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

On steep hills Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

207

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W h

en drivin g

Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-

tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.

Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and

should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.

Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation.

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces.

TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spin- ning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.

Hill-start assist control

P. 212

EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel.

Enhanced VSC (Enhanced vehicle stability control)

Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS. Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling steering performance.

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if equipped)

P. 214

208

2-4. Using other driving systems

When the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating

The slip indicator flashes to indi- cate that the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating.

Disabling the TRAC/VSC systems

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRAC/VSC sys- tems may reduce power from the hybrid system to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

Turning off the TRAC system only

Quickly push and release the switch to turn off TRAC.

The TRAC OFF indicator light should come on.

Press the switch again to turn the system back on.

209

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W h

en drivin g

Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems

Push and hold the switch for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped to turn off TRAC and VSC.

The TRAC OFF and VSC OFF indicator lights should come on.

Press the switch again to turn the systems back on.

When the TRAC OFF indicator light comes on even if the VSC OFF switch has not been pressed

TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer.

Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, TRAC and VSC

A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the hybrid system is started or just after the vehicle begins to move, if the brake pedal is depressed forcefully or repeatedly, or 1 - 2 minuets after the hybrid system is stopped. This sound does not indicate that a malfunc- tion has occurred in any of these systems.

Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop. The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated. The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

Reactivation of the TRAC/VSC systems after turning off the hybrid sys- tem

Turning off the hybrid system after turning off the TRAC/VSC systems will automatically reactivate them.

210

2-4. Using other driving systems

Reactivation of the TRAC system linked to vehicle speed

When only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle speed increases. However, when both TRAC and VSC sys- tems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.

Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.

If the slip indicator comes on...

It may indicate a malfunction in the TRAC, VSC and ABS. Contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

The ABS does not operate effectively when

The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).

The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.

Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor- mal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicles stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the fol- lowing situations:

When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

When driving with tire chains

When driving over bumps in the road

When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven surfaces

211

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W h

en drivin g

CAUTION

TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip- pery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating. Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

When the VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.

When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi- tions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

Handling of tires and suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

212

2-4. Using other driving systems

Hill-start assist control

Hill-start assist control can be operated when

The shift lever is in a position other than P.

The parking brake is not applied.

The accelerator pedal is not depressed.

Hill-start assist control

While hill-start assist control is operating, the brakes remain automati- cally applied after the driver releases the brake pedal. The stop lights and the high mounted stoplight turn on.

Hill-start assist control operates for about 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released.

If the slip indicator does not flash and the buzzer does not sound when the brake pedal is further depressed, slightly reduce the pressure on the brake pedal (do not allow the vehicle to roll backward) and then firmly depress it again. If the system still does not operate, check if the operat- ing conditions explained above have been met.

Hill-start assist control helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards when starting on an incline or slippery slope.

To engage hill-start assist con- trol, further depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped completely.

A buzzer will sound once to indicate the system is acti- vated. The slip indicator will also start flashing.

213

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W h

en drivin g

Hill-start assist control buzzer

When hill-start assist control is activated, the buzzer will sound once.

In the following situations, hill-start assist control will be canceled and the buzzer will sound twice.

No attempt is made to drive the vehicle within approximately 2 seconds of releasing the brake pedal.

The shift lever is moved to P. The parking brake is applied. The brake pedal is depressed again. The brake pedal has been depressed for more than approximately 3

minutes.

If the slip indicator comes on

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Hill-start assist control

Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on extremely steep inclines or roads covered in ice.

Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline for an extended period of time, as doing so may lead to an accident.

214

2-4. Using other driving systems

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

: If equipped

The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions;

The Blind Spot Monitor function

Assists the driver in making the decision when changing lanes

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function

Assists the driver when backing up

These functions use same sensors.

BSM main switch

Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is set to on, the switchs indicator illuminates. Common switch for Blind Spot Monitor function and Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.

Outside rear view mirror indicator

Blind Spot Monitor function: When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mir- ror indicator comes on while the turn signal lever is not operated and the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes while the turn signal lever is operated.

215

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W h

en drivin g

The Blind Spot Monitor function

The Blind Spot Monitor function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling in an adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicles existence via the outside rear view mirror indicator.

The Blind Spot Monitor function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The range of the detection area extends to:

Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from the side of the vehicle

The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle is not in the detection area

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper

Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) for- ward of the rear bumper

Rear Cross Traffic Alert function: When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, the outside rear view mirror indicators flash.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer (Rear Cross Traffic Alert function only)

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, a buzzer sounds from behind the rear seat.

216

2-4. Using other driving systems

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert functions when your vehicle is in reverse. It can detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle. It uses radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehicles existence through flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

To give the driver a more consistent time to react, the buzzer can alert for faster vehicles from farther away.

Approaching vehicles Detection areas

217

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W h

en drivin g

Example:

Approaching vehicle Speed Approximate alert

distance

Fast 18 mph (28 km/h) 65 ft. (20 m)

Slow 5 mph (8 km/h) 18 ft. (5.5 m)

The Blind Spot Monitor function is operational when

The BSM main switch is set to on

Vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

The Blind Spot Monitor function will detect a vehicle when

A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.

Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.

Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function will not detect a vehicle

The Blind Spot Monitor function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:

Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.*

Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction

Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*

Following vehicles that are in the same lane*

Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle*

*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

218

2-4. Using other driving systems

Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function may not func- tion correctly

The Blind Spot Monitorfunction may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:

During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc. When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water

etc. When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle

and the vehicle that enters the detection area When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the

detection area as your vehicle accelerates When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a

dip in the road etc. When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each

vehicle When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far

away from your vehicle When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about

the same speed as your vehicle When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle

and the vehicle that enters the detection area Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the

vehicle

Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase under the following conditions:

When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guard- rail, wall etc.

When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a follow- ing vehicle.

When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle enters the detection area

When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle

219

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W h

en drivin g

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is operational when

The BSM main switch is set to on.

The shift lever is in R.

Vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).

Approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 18 mph (28 km/h).

Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function will not detect a vehicle

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects.

Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.* Vehicles approaching from directly behind

Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects* Vehicles moving away from your vehicle

Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle* Vehicles backing up in the parking space next to your vehicle

Vehicles passing quickly through the detection area

*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

220

2-4. Using other driving systems

Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not function correctly

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:

When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper

During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.

When multiple vehicles approach continuously

Shallow angle parking

When a vehicle is approaching at high speed

When parking on a steep incline, such as hills, a dip in the road etc.

Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on

Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer hearing

Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may be difficult to hear over loud noises such as high audio volume.

The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility

When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.

When there is a malfunction in the system

If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, warning messages will be displayed: (P. 502)

There is a malfunction with the sensors

The sensors have become dirty

The outside temperature is extremely high or low

The sensor voltage has become abnormal

Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect because of obstacles

221

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W h

en drivin g

Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor system

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: OAYSRR2A

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following three conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan- dard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05-24.25 GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

222

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION

Cautions regarding the use of the system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

The Blind Spot Monitor function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor function. The function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is only an assist and is not a replace- ment for careful driving. Driver must be careful when backing up, even when using Rear Cross Traffic Alert function. The drivers own visual confirmation of behind you and your vehicle is necessary and be sure there are no pedes- trians, other vehicles etc. before backing up. Failure to do so could cause death or serious injury.

According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the drivers own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

223

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W h

en drivin g

CAUTION

Handling the radar sensor

One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor system can function correctly.

Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may mal- function and vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Do not disassemble the sensor.

Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

Keep the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper clean at all times.

224

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1)Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicle's placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug- gage load capacity.

For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the avail- able cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

Take notice of the following information about storage precau-

tions, cargo capacity and load:

Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.

Be sure all items are secured in place.

To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage evenly within the luggage compartment.

For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

225

2-5. Driving information

2

W h

en drivin g

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

(P. 550)

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Calculation formula for your vehicle

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) (P. 550)

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)

*1: A =Weight of people *2: B =Total load capacity *3: C =Available cargo and luggage load

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)

*4: D =Additional weight of people *5: E =Available cargo and luggage load

226

2-5. Driving information

As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

CAUTION

Things that must not be carried in the trunk

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:

Receptacles containing gasoline

Aerosol cans

Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.

To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low, as close to the floor as possible.

When you fold down the rear seat, long items should not be place directly behind the front seats.

Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts prop- erly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

227

2-5. Driving information

2

W h

en drivin g

CAUTION

Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, block the drivers vision, or hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident:

At the feet of the driver On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items) On the package tray On the instrument panel On the dashboard

Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci- dent.

Capacity and distribution

Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.

Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking con- trol which may cause death or serious injury.

228

2-5. Driving information

Vehicle load limits

Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P. 449)

CAUTION

Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,

towing capacity and cargo capacity.

Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): (P. 550)

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

Towing capacity

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

229

2-5. Driving information

2

W h

en drivin g

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving

the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri-

ate to the prevailing weather conditions.

Pre-winter preparations

Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem- peratures.

Engine oil Engine/power control unit coolant Washer fluid

Have a service technician inspect the level and specific grav- ity of battery electrolyte.

Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions:

Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.

Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.

Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.

230

2-5. Driving information

Selecting tire chains

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains. Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain:

0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter

0.39 in. (10 mm) in width

1.18 in. (30 mm) in length

Cross chain:

0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter

0.55 in. (14 mm) in width

0.98 in. (25 mm) in length

Regulations on the use of tire chains

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to loca- tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suit- able to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle

Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.

231

2-5. Driving information

2

W h

en drivin g

Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:

Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.

Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4 1/2 mile (0.5 1.0 km).

Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

CAUTION

Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

Use tires of the size specified.

Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.

Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.

Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con- trol is maintained.

232

2-5. Driving information

NOTICE

Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legiti- mate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the opera- tion of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.

233

2-5. Driving information

2

W h

en drivin g

Trailer towing

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or

the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow

hitch mounted carriers.

234

2-5. Driving information

Dinghy towing

NOTICE

To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on

the ground) behind a motor home.

235

2-5. Driving information

2

W h

en drivin g

236

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system ........................... 238

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers....................... 248

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types.......... 249

Audio system ................... 251

Steering wheel audio switches ......................... 254

USB/AUX port .................. 256

Basic audio operations..... 258

Setup menu...................... 261

General settings............... 262

Audio settings .................. 264

Display settings................ 265

Voice settings................... 267

Selecting the audio source ............................ 268

List screen operation........ 269

Optimal use of the audio system.................. 271

Radio operation................ 272

CD player operation ......... 274

Listening to an iPod ......... 281

Listening to a USB memory device .............. 287

Using the AUX port .......... 293

Preparations to use wireless communication............... 294

Registering a Bluetooth audio player for the first time ......................... 298

Registering a Bluetooth phone for the first time ......................... 299

Registering a Bluetooth device ............................ 300

Connecting a Bluetooth device ............................ 303

Displaying a Bluetooth device details ................. 306

Detailed Bluetooth system settings .............. 308

Listening to Bluetooth audio .............................. 310

Using a Bluetooth phone............................. 312

Making a call .................... 314

Receiving a call ................ 318

Speaking on the phone .... 319

Bluetooth phone message function........... 323

Using the steering wheel switches ......................... 328

Bluetooth phone settings .......................... 329

Contact/Call history settings .......................... 331

Interior features 3

Interior features 3

237

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)........... 342

Bluetooth........................ 346

Voice command system ........................... 350

Rear view monitor system ........................... 353

3-3. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list ............... 364 Interior lights .................. 365 Personal lights ............... 366

3-4. Using the storage features

List of storage features .... 367 Glove box....................... 368 Console box................... 369 Coin holder .................... 370 Bottle holders................. 371 Cup holders ................... 372 Auxiliary boxes............... 374

3-5. Other interior features

Sun visors ........................ 376

Vanity mirrors................... 377

Clock ................................ 378

Outside temperature display............................ 379

Ashtray............................. 380

Power outlets ................... 381

Seat heaters..................... 383

Armrest ............................ 385

Assist grips....................... 386

Coat hooks....................... 387

Floor mat.......................... 388

Trunk features.................. 390

Garage door opener......... 391

Compass.......................... 398

Safety Connect ................ 402

238

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the

temperature setting.

Cooling and dehumidification

function on/off button

Front passengers side temperature setting displayDrivers side

temperature control

DUAL button

Automatic

mode

Off

Drivers side temperature setting display

Fan speed

Outside air or recirculated air mode

Fan speed

display Front passengers side temperature control

Windshield defogger

Air outlet display

Change the air outlets used

239

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Using the automatic air conditioning system

Press .

The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temper- ature setting.

Turn clockwise to increase the temperature and turn

counterclockwise to decrease the temperature.

When is pressed (the indicator is on) or the passen-

gers side temperature control dial is turned, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

Automatic mode indicator

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the auto- matic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for func- tions other than that operated are maintained.

STEP 1

STEP 2

240

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Adjusting the settings manually

To adjust the fan speed, press > on to increase the fan speed and < to decrease the fan speed.

Press to turn the fan off.

To adjust the temperature setting, turn clockwise to

increase the temperature and turn counterclockwise to

decrease the temperature.

When is pressed (the indicator is on) or the passen-

gers side temperature control dial is turned, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

To change the air outlets, press < or > on .

The air outlets used are switched each time either side of the button is pressed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

241

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Defogging the windshield

Press .

The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases. Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automati- cally.) To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up. To return to the previous mode,

press again when the

windshield is defogged.

Air outlets and air flow

Air flows to the upper body.

: AVV50L-CEXGBA models* only

242

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Air flows to the upper body and feet.

: AVV50L-CEXGBA models* only

Air flows to the feet.

*: When the warming function is operating, air flows to the upper body as well to warm the upper body effectively.

: AVV50L-CEXGBA models* only

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

: AVV50L-CEXGBA models* only

*: The model code is indicated on the manufacturers label. (P. 550)

*

*

243

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches between outside air mode (the indicator is off) and recirculated air mode (the indicator is on) each time the button is pressed.

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Front center outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Front side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

244

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear outlets (if equipped)

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to pri- oritize fuel efficiency:

Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/ cooling capacity

Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected

To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:

Adjust the fan speed

Turn off Eco drive mode

Customization

The air conditioning control of Eco drive mode can be changed to the same setting as that used in normal drive mode. (Customizable features P. 576)

Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow

immediately after is pressed.

245

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Fogging up of the windows

The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.

Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the

windshield effectively.

If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.

The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

Windshield fog detection function

When automatic mode is set, the humidity sensor (P. 247) detects fog on the windshield and controls the air conditioning system to prevent fog.

Outside/recirculated air mode

When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. Dur- ing cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.

Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.

When the outside temperature exceeds 75F (24C) and the air condi- tioning system is on

In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air condi- tioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption.

Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the POWER switch is turned to ON mode.

It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

.

When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32F (0C)

The dehumidification function may not operate even when is

pressed.

246

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Air conditioning odors

During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.

To reduce potential odors from occurring:

It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.

Air conditioning filter

P. 456

Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

Settings (e.g. air conditioning setting) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 576)

CAUTION

To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.

The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

247

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3

Inte rior fe

atures

NOTICE

Humidity sensor

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

In order to detect fog on the windshield, a sensor which monitors the temperature of the windshield, the surround humidity, etc. is installed. (P. 245) Follow these points to avoid damaging the sensor:

Do not disassemble the sensor

Do not spray the glass cleaner on the sensor or subject it to strong impacts

Do not stick anything on the sensor

248

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

The defoggers can be operated when

The POWER switch is in ON mode.

The outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped)

Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror defoggers on.

CAUTION

When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on (if equipped)

Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can become very hot and burn you.

Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-

drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Turns the defoggers on/off

The defoggers will automati- cally turn off the operation time. The operation time is between 15 minutes and 1 hour depending on the ambient temperature and vehicle speed.

Vehicles without outside rear view mirror defoggers Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers

A

B

249

3

Inte rior fe

atures

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types

Entune Audio

Title Page

Using the radio P. 272

Using the CD player P. 274

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 274

Operating an iPod P. 281

Operating a USB memory P. 287

Optimal use of the audio system P. 271

Using the AUX port P. 293

250

3-2. Using the audio system

Entune Audio Plus

Owners of this system should refer to the Navigation and Multime- dia System Owner's Manual.

Entune Premium Audio with Navigation

Owners of this system should refer to the Navigation and Multime- dia System Owner's Manual.

251

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Audio system

Audio system operation buttons

Operations such as listening to audio, using the hands-free phone

and changing audio settings are started by using the following but-

tons.

AUDIO button

Display the Select Audio Source

screen or audio top screen. (P. 268)

button

Press this button to access the

Bluetooth hands-free system.

(P. 312)

CAR button

Press this button to access the energy

monitor/consumption screen. (P. 41)

SETUP button

Press this button to customize the

function settings. (P. 261)

252

3-2. Using the audio system

Operating the touch screen

By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the audio system, etc.

Drag* Touch the screen with your finger, and move the screen to the desired position.

Scrolling the lists

Flick* Touch the screen with your finger and quickly move the screen by flicking your finger.

Scrolling the main screen page

*:The above operations may not be performed on all screens.

When using the touch screen

If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be operating slightly slower than normal.

The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sun- glasses. Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the Display Settings screen (P. 265) or remove your sunglasses.

Flick operations may not be performed smoothly in high altitudes.

253

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

NOTICE

To avoid damaging the touch screen

To prevent damaging the screen, lightly touch the screen buttons with your finger.

Do not use objects other than your finger to touch the screen.

Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners to clean the screen, as they may damage the touch screen.

254

3-2. Using the audio system

Steering wheel audio switches

Operating the audio system using the steering wheel switches

Volume switch

Increases/decreases vol- ume

Press and hold: Continu- ously increases/decreases volume

Back switch

Returns to the previous screen

Cursor switch

Selects (radio stations/radio presets/tracks/files/songs)

Moves cursor Press and hold: Seek up/

down (radio stations) Fast up/down (tracks/files) Enter switch

Displays the preset/list screen

Selects items

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the

steering wheel.

Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or navi-

gation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the

audio system or navigation system.

255

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

MODE/HOLD switch

Changes audio source Press and hold this switch

to mute or pause the current operation To cancel the mute or pause, press and hold

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

256

3-2. Using the audio system

USB/AUX port

Connecting using the USB/AUX port

iPod

Push the lid.

Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable.

Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.

USB memory

Push the lid.

Open the cover and connect the USB memory device.

Turn on the power of the USB memory device if it is not turned on.

Portable audio player

Push the lid.

Open the cover and connect the portable audio player.

Turn on the power of the portable audio player if it is not turned on.

Connect an iPod, USB memory device or portable audio player to the

USB/AUX port as indicated below. Select iPod, USB or AUX on

the audio source selection screen and the device can be operated

via audio system.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

257

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

CAUTION

While driving

Do not connect a device or operate the device controls.

258

3-2. Using the audio system

Basic audio operations

Operating the audio system

Basic audio operations and functions common to each mode are

explained in this section.

Press the or button

to seek up or down for a

radio station, or to access a

desired track or file.

Press this knob to turn the audio sys-

tem on and off, and turn it to adjust

the volume.

Press this button to eject a disc

Press to pause

or resume play-

ing music.

Insert a disc

into the disc slot

: Select to pause music.

: Select to resume playing

music.

Turn this knob to select radio

station bands, tracks and files.

Also the knob can be used to

select items in the list display.

259

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Random playback

Select to change on/off.

Repeat play

Select to change on/off.

Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

CAUTION

Laser product

This product is a class 1 laser product.

Do not open the cover of the player or attempt to repair the unit yourself. Refer servicing to qualified personnel.

Laser products

Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself. This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disas- semble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.

This product utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation expo- sure. THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD.

260

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.

To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

261

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Setup menu

Display Setup screen

Press the SETUP button to display the Setup screen.

Select to adjust the settings for operation sounds, screen animation, etc. (P. 262)

Select to set the voice set- tings. (P. 267)

Select to adjust the settings for contrast and brightness of the screen. (P. 265)

Select to adjust the settings for registering, removing, con- necting and disconnecting Bluetooth devices. (P. 308)

Select to adjust the settings for phone sound, phonebook, etc. (P. 331)

Select to set radio and exter- nal media settings. (P. 264)

Select to turn the screen off.

Select to set the vehicle cus- tomization. (P. 576)

You can adjust the audio system to your desired settings.

262

3-2. Using the audio system

General settings

Screen for general settings

Press the SETUP button.

Select General on the Setup screen.

English, Franais or Espaol can be selected.

On/off can be selected to sound beeps.

Select to change the screen color.

Select to change the keyboard layout.

The animation effect for the audio source selection screen can be set to on/off.

Select to delete personal data (P. 263)

Select to update program ver- sions. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Select to display the software information. Notices related to third party software used in this product are enlisted. (This includes instructions for obtaining such software, where applicable.)

Settings are available for adjusting the operation sounds, screen

animation, etc.

STEP 1

STEP 2

263

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Delete personal data

Select Delete Personal Data on the General Settings screen.

Select Delete.

Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once deleted.

A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select Yes.

The following personal data will be deleted or changed to its default settings.

General settings

Audio settings

Phone settings

To return to the default volume settings

Select Default, and then Yes.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

264

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio settings

Screen for audio settings

Press the SETUP button.

Select Audio on the Setup screen.

Number of Radio Presets Select the number of radio preset stations.

Display Cover Art on/off

Automatic Sound Levelizer (P. 264)

Automatic sound leveliser (ASL)

Select Automatic Sound Levelizer.

Select High, Mid, Low or Off.

Settings are available for adjusting the radio operation, cover art,

etc.

STEP 1

STEP 2

About Automatic Sound Leveliser (ASL)

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehi- cle speed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

265

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Display settings

Screen for display settings

Press the SETUP button.

Select Display on the Setup screen.

Adjust screen contrast/bright- ness

Adjust screen contrast/bright- ness of the rear view monitor camera

Changes to day mode.

Settings are available for adjusting the contrast and brightness of

the screen.

STEP 1

STEP 2

266

3-2. Using the audio system

Adjusting the screen contrast/brightness

Select General or Camera on the Display Settings screen.

Adjust the display as desired by selecting + or -.

Day mode

When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims. However, the screen can be switched to day mode by selecting Day Mode.

The screen will stay in day mode when the headlights are turned on until Day Mode is selected again.

STEP 1

STEP 2

267

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Voice settings

Adjust the voice guidance vol- ume setting.

Set the voice recognition prompts High, Low or Off.

Set the train voice recognition.

Set the voice prompt interrupt on/off.

Set the voice recognition tuto- rial.

This screen is used for guidance for voice command systems set-

ting.

To return to the default volume settings

Select Default, and then Yes.

268

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting the audio source

Changing audio source

Press the AUDIO button to display the audio source selec- tion screen.

If the audio source selection screen is not displayed, press the AUDIO button again.

Select the desired audio source.

Select the desired audio source then or to reor- der.

Using the steering wheel switches to change audio source

The audio source changes as follows each time the MODE/HOLD switch is pressed.

Switching between audio sources such as radio and CD are

explained in this section.

STEP 1

STEP 2

269

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

List screen operation

How to scroll

: Select to scroll to the next or previous page.

: If appears to the right of titles, the complete titles are too long for the display. Select this button to scroll the title.

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to move the cursor box to select a desired item from the list, and press the TUNE/SCROLL knob to play it. The track that is being played is highlighted.

To return to the top screen, select Now Playing on the list screen.

When a list style screen is displayed, use the appropriate buttons to

scroll through the list.

270

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks/files/songs

Selecting a track/file/song

Press the or button on SEEK/TRACK or turn the TUNE/ SCROLL knob to select the desired track/file/song number.

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold the or button on SEEK/TRACK.

Selecting a track/file/song from the track/file/song list

Select Browse on cover art.

Select the desired track/file/ song.

When an MP3/WMA/AAC disc or USB memory device is being used, the folder can be selected. When a Bluetooth device or iPod is being used, the album can be selected.

According to the audio device, the following is displayed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Audio source List name

Audio CD Track

MP3/WMA/AAC disc Folder, File

Bluetooth Album, Track

USB Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers

iPod Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers, Audiobooks, Videos

271

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Optimal use of the audio system

How to adjust the sound settings and sound quality

Select - or + to adjust the treble, mid or bass to a level between -5 and 5.

Select Front or Rear to adjust the front/rear audio balance.

Select L or R to adjust the left/right audio bal- ance.

On the Sound Settings screen, sound quality (Treble/Mid/Bass),

volume balance can be adjusted.

The sound quality level is adjusted individually

The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for each audio mode sepa- rately.

272

3-2. Using the audio system

Radio operation

Audio control screen

Pressing the AUDIO button displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.

Audio source selection screen appears

Preset stations

Scanning for receivable sta- tion

Select to display a list of receivable stations

Setting the sound (P. 271)

Selecting a station

Tune in to the desired station using one of the following methods.

Seek tuning

Press the or button on SEEK/TRACK.

The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop when a station is found.

Manual tuning

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob.

Preset stations

Select the desired preset station.

Select AM or FM on the audio source selection screen to begin

listening to the radio.

273

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Setting station presets

Search for desired stations by turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob or pressing the or button on SEEK/TRACK.

Select (add new)

To change the preset station to a different one, select and hold the preset station.

Select Yes.

Select OK after setting the new preset station.

Refreshing the station list

Select Refresh on the Station List screen.

To cancel the refresh, select Cancel Refresh.

Reception sensitivity

Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the con- tinually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

274

3-2. Using the audio system

CD player operation

Audio control screen

Pressing the AUDIO button displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.

Audio source selection screen appears

Displaying the track/file list

Random playback (P. 259)

Repeat play (P. 259)

Pause Select to resume play

Setting the sound (P. 271)

Insert disc or select CD on the audio source selection screen with

a disc inserted to begin listening to a CD.

275

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Displaying the title and artist name

If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed.

Error messages

If an error message is displayed, refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea- tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.

CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected.

If a disc is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

Disc may be damaged and may not play properly.

Message Cause Correction procedures

Check DISC

The disc is dirty or damaged.

The disc is inserted upside down.

The disc is not play- able with the player.

Clean the disc. Insert the disc cor-

rectly. Confirm the disc is

playable with the player.

Disc Error There is a malfunc- tion within the sys- tem.

Eject the disc.

No music files found.

No playable data is included on the disc.

Eject the disc.

276

3-2. Using the audio system

Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

MP3, WMA and AAC files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.

MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.

MP3 file compatibility

Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 LAYER3: 32-320 (kbps) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8-160 (kbps)

Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

WMA file compatibility

Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (only compatible with Windows Media Audio Stan- dard)

Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback) Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48-192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48-320 (kbps)

277

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

AAC file compatibility

Compatible standards MPEG4/AAC-LC

Compatible sampling frequencies 11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)

Compatible bit rates 16-320 (kbps) Compatible channel modes: 1ch and 2ch

Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2 CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet) UDF (2.01 or lower)

MP3, WMA and AAC files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root) Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root) Maximum number of files per disc: 255

File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.

Discs containing multi-session recordings

As the audio system is compatible with multi session discs, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3, WMA and AAC files. However, only the first session can be played.

278

3-2. Using the audio system

ID3, WMA and AAC tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

MP3, WMA and AAC playback

When a disc containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA or AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recom- mend you do not write any files to the disc other than MP3, WMA or AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.

Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3, WMA or AAC format data cannot be played.

Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than MP3, WMA and AAC files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3, WMA and AAC files. This may result in large amounts of interfer- ence and damage to the speakers.

279

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Playback

To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.

There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3, WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be pos- sible at all.

When files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trade- marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

280

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE

Discs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of discs.

Also, do not use 8 cm (3 in.) disc adapters, Dual Discs or printable discs.

Doing so may damage the player and/or disc insert/eject function.

Discs that have a diameter that is not 12 cm (4.7 in.).

Low-quality or deformed discs.

Discs with a transparent or translucent recording area.

Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off.

Player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the player itself.

Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.

Do not apply oil to the player.

Store discs away from direct sunlight.

Never try to disassemble any part of the player.

281

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Listening to an iPod

Connecting an iPod

P. 256

Audio control screen

Pressing the AUDIO button displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.

Audio source selection screen appears

Displays cover art

Selecting the play mode (P. 282)

Shuffle play (P. 282)

Repeat play (P. 282)

Pause Select to resume play- back

Setting the sound (P. 271)

Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle

speakers.

Select iPod on the audio source selection screen.

When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the

system can only output the sound by selecting the browse screen.

282

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting a play mode

Select Browse on the screen.

Select the desired play mode. Then select a song to begin using the selected play mode.

Shuffle play

Select to change on/off.

Repeat play

Select to change on/off.

STEP 1

STEP 2

283

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

About iPod

Made for iPod and Made for iPhone mean that an electronic acces- sory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple per- formance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.

iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.

iPod cover art

Depending on the iPod and songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be dis- played.

This function can be changed to On/Off. (P. 281)

It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be oper- ated while the cover art display is in process.

Only iPod cover art that is saved in JPEG format can be displayed.

iPod functions

When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and recon- necting it may resolve the problem.

284

3-2. Using the audio system

While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's audio system instead.

When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If so, charge the iPod before use.

Compatible models (P. 285)

iPod problems

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner's Manual.

Error messages

Message Cause/Correction procedures

Connection error. Please consult your Owner's Manual for instructions on how to connect the iPod.

This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.

No music files found. This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.

No videos found. This indicates that no video files are included in the iPod.

There are no songs available for playback. Please add compatible files to your iPod.

This indicates that songs are not found in a selected playlist.

iPod authorization unsuccessful.

This indicates that the audio system failed to authorize the iPod. Please check your iPod.

285

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Compatible models

The following iPod, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone

devices can be used with this system.

Made for

iPod touch (5th generation) iPod touch (4th generation) iPod touch (3rd generation) iPod touch (2nd generation) iPod touch (1st generation) iPod classic iPod with video iPod nano (7th generation) iPod nano (6th generation) iPod nano (5th generation) iPod nano (4th generation) iPod nano (3rd generation) iPod nano (2nd generation) iPod nano (1st generation) iPhone 5 iPhone 4S iPhone 4 iPhone 3GS iPhone 3G iPhone

Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this system.

CAUTION

While driving

Do not connect an iPod or operate the controls.

286

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the iPod or its terminals

Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.

Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is connected.

Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

287

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Listening to a USB memory device

Connecting a USB memory device

P. 256

Audio control screen

Pressing the AUDIO button displays the audio control screen from any screens of the selected source.

Audio source selection screen appears

Displaying the folder list

Random playback (P. 259)

Repeat play (P. 259)

Pause Select to resume play- back

Setting the sound (P. 271)

Selecting a play mode

Select Browse on the screen.

Select the desired play mode. Then select a song to begin using the selected play mode.

Displaying the now playing list

Touch the cover art display.

Connecting a USB memory device enables you to enjoy music from

the vehicle speakers.

Touch USB on the audio source selection screen.

STEP 1

STEP 2

288

3-2. Using the audio system

USB memory functions

Depending on the USB memory device that is connected to the system, the device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.

If the USB memory device still does not begin operation after being dis- connected and reconnected, format the memory.

Error messages for USB memory

Message Cause/Correction procedures

Connection error. Please consult your Owner's Manual for instructions on how to connect the USB device.

This indicates a problem with the USB memory device or its connection.

There are no files avail- able for playback. Please add compatible files to your USB device.

This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included on the USB memory device.

289

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

USB memory

Compatible devices

USB memory device that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback.

Compatible device formats

The following device format can be used:

USB communication format: USB2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps) File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows) Correspondence class: Mass storage class

MP3, WMA and AAC files written to a device with any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root) Maximum number of files in a device: 9999 Maximum number of files per folder: 255

MP3, WMA and AAC files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format. Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.

MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.

290

3-2. Using the audio system

MP3 file compatibility

Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III)

Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps) MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps)

Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

WMA file compatibility

Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

Compatible sampling frequencies HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

Compatible bit rates HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, VBR)

AAC file compatibility

Compatible standards MPEG4/AAC-LC

Compatible sampling frequencies 11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)

Compatible bit rates 16-320 (kbps)

Compatible channel modes: 1 ch and 2 ch

File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.

291

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

ID3, WMA and AAC tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

MP3, WMA and AAC playback

When a device containing MP3, WMA and AAC files is connected, all files in the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is fin- ished, the first MP3, WMA and AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3, WMA and AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.

When a USB memory device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB memory device will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reconnected (and the con- tents have not been changed), the USB memory device will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than MP3, WMA and AAC files, they will be skipped (not played).

Playback

To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3, WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be pos- sible at all.

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trade- marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

292

3-2. Using the audio system

CAUTION

While driving

Do not connect a USB memory device or operate the device controls.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals

Do not leave the USB memory device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the USB memory device.

Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory device while it is connected.

Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

293

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Using the AUX port

Connecting a portable audio player

P. 256

Operating portable audio players connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio player itself.

When using a portable audio player connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio player.

CAUTION

While driving

Do not connect a portable audio player or operate the device controls.

To use the AUX port, connect a portable player, press the AUDIO

button, then select AUX to display the audio control screen.

294

3-2. Using the audio system

Preparations to use wireless communication

About Bluetooth

CAUTION

Certifications for the Bluetooth

FCC ID: BABFT0049B

The following can be performed using Bluetooth wireless commu-

nication:

A portable audio player can be operated and listened to via audio system

Hands-free phone calls can be made via a cellular phone

In order to use wireless communication, register and connect a

Bluetooth device by performing the following procedures.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

295

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

CAUTION

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Expo- sure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 20cm and more between the radiator and per- son's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is sub- ject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

IC: 2024B-FT0049B

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan- dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device.

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure

This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.

This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).

But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 20cm and more between the radiator and person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

296

3-2. Using the audio system

Device registration/connection flow

1. Register the Bluetooth device to be used with audio sys- tem (P. 298, 299, 300)

2. Connect the Bluetooth device to be used (P. 303)

To be used for audio To be used for hands-free phone

3. Start Bluetooth connec- tion (P. 303)

3. Start Bluetooth connec- tion (P. 303)

4. Check connection sta- tus (P. 310)

4. Check connection sta- tus (P. 313)

5. Use Bluetooth audio (P. 310)

5. Use Bluetooth phone (P. 312)

297

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Registering and connecting from the Bluetooth* Setup screen

To display the screen shown below, press the SETUP button and select Bluetooth* on the Setup screen.

Select to connect the device to be used with audio system. (P. 303)

Select to register a Bluetooth

device to be used with audio system. (P. 300)

Select to set detailed Bluetooth system settings. (P. 308)

Select to delete registered devices. (P. 302)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trade- mark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

298

3-2. Using the audio system

Registering a Bluetooth audio player for the first time

Turn the Bluetooth connection setting of your audio player on.

Press the AUDIO button.

Select Audio.

Select Select Device.

Follow the steps in How to registering a Bluetooth device from STEP 2. (P. 300)

To use the Bluetooth Audio, it is necessary to register an audio

player with the system.

Once the player has been registered, it is possible to use the

Bluetooth Audio.

For details about registering a Bluetooth device (P. 300)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

299

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Registering a Bluetooth phone for the first time

Turn the Bluetooth connection setting of your cellular phone on.

Press the button.

Select OK to register a phone.

Follow the steps in How to register a Bluetooth device from STEP 3. (P. 300)

To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a

Bluetooth phone with the system.

Once the phone has been registered, it is possible to use the hands-

free system.

For details about registering a Bluetooth device (P. 300)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

300

3-2. Using the audio system

Registering a Bluetooth device

How to register a Bluetooth device

Display the Bluetooth* Setup screen. (P. 297)

*:Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Select Add.

When this screen is displayed, search for the device name dis- played on this screen on the screen of your Bluetooth

device.

For details about operating the Bluetooth device, see the man- ual that comes with it.

To cancel the registration, select Cancel.

Register the Bluetooth device using your Bluetooth device.

A PIN-code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compat- ible Bluetooth devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth device being connected, a message confirming registration may be dis- played on the Bluetooth devices screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth device according to the confirmation message.

Bluetooth compatible phones (HFP) and portable audio players

(AVP) can be registered simultaneously. You can register up to 5

Bluetooth devices.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 14

301

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Check that this screen is dis- played when registration is com- plete.

Select OK when the connection status changes from Con- necting... to Connected.

If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again.

Registration can be performed from screens other than the Bluetooth* Setup screen.

When registering from the Bluetooth* Audio screen

Display the Bluetooth* Audio screen. (P. 268)

Select Select Device.

Follow the steps in How to register a Bluetooth device from STEP 2. (P. 300)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

STEP 5

STEP 16

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

302

3-2. Using the audio system

Deleting a Bluetooth device

Display the Bluetooth* Setup screen. (P. 297)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Select Remove.

Select the desired device.

A confirmation message will be displayed, select Yes to delete the device.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the oper- ation is complete.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

303

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Connecting a Bluetooth device

Press the SETUP button.

Select Bluetooth*.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Select the device to be con- nected.

Supported profile icons will be displayed.

Phone

Audio player

Supported profile icons for cur- rently connected devices will illu- minate.

Dimmed icons can be selected to connect to the function directly.

Up to 5 Bluetooth devices (Phones (HFP) and audio players (AVP))

can be registered.

If more than 1 Bluetooth device has been registered, select which

device to connect to.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

304

3-2. Using the audio system

Auto connection

To turn auto connection mode on, set Bluetooth* Power to on. (P. 308)

When you register a phone, auto connection will be activated. Always set it to this mode and leave the Bluetooth phone in a place where a connection can be established.

When the POWER switch is turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system will search for a nearby cellular phone you have registered.

Next, the system automatically connects with the most recent of the phones connected to in the past. Then, the connection result is displayed.

Manual connection

When auto connection has failed or Bluetooth* Power is turned off, you must connect the Bluetooth device manually.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Follow the steps in Connecting a Bluetooth device from STEP 1. (P. 303)

Connecting a Bluetooth audio player

Registering an additional device

Select Select Device on the Bluetooth audio control screen.

For more information: P. 300

Selecting a registered device

Select Select Device on the Bluetooth audio control screen.

For more information: P. 303

STEP 1

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

305

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Reconnecting a Bluetooth phone

If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the POWER switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.

If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, the connection must be made manually, or the phone must be rese- lected.

306

3-2. Using the audio system

Displaying a Bluetooth device details

Bluetooth device registration status

Display the Bluetooth* Setup screen. (P. 297)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Select the device.

Select Device Info.

Following screen is displayed:

Change device name

Change connection method

Bluetooth Address

Display your telephone num- ber The number may not be dis- played depending on the model of phone.

Compatibility profile of the device

Restore default settings

You can confirm and change the registered device details.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

307

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Changing connection method

Select Connect Audio Player from.

Select Vehicle or Device.

Vehicle: Connect the audio system to the portable audio player.

Device: Connect the portable audio player to the audio system.

STEP 1

STEP 2

308

3-2. Using the audio system

Detailed Bluetooth system settings

How to check and change detailed Bluetooth settings

Display the Bluetooth* Setup screen. (P. 297)

Select System Settings.

The following screen is displayed:

Bluetooth Power on/off

You can change Bluetooth func- tion on/off

Change Bluetooth name

Change PIN-code (P. 309)

Bluetooth address

Display phone status

Select to set the phone connec- tion status display on/off.

Display audio player status

Select to set the connection sta- tus display of the audio player on/ off.

Compatibility profile of the sys- tem

Restore default settings

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth settings.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

309

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Editing the Bluetooth* PIN

You can change the PIN-code that is used to register your Bluetooth

devices in the system.

Select Bluetooth* PIN.

Input a PIN-code, and select OK.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

STEP 1

STEP 2

310

3-2. Using the audio system

Listening to Bluetooth audio

Status display

You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge on the screen.

Connection status

Battery charge

The Bluetooth audio system enables the user to enjoy music

played on a portable player from the vehicle speakers via wireless

communication.

When a Bluetooth device cannot be connected, check the con- nection status on the Bluetooth* Audio screen. If the device is not connected, either register or reconnect the device. (P. 303)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

311

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Playing Bluetooth audio

Select or to Play/Pause.

For details on Bluetooth* Audio screen operation methods, refer to Basic Audio Operations. (P. 258)

For details on how to select a track or album, refer to selecting, fast- forwarding and reversing tracks/files/songs. (P. 270)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Indicators Conditions

Connection status Good Not connected

Battery charge Full Empty

312

3-2. Using the audio system

Using a Bluetooth phone

Phone screen

To display the screen shown below, press the switch on the steering wheel or the button.

Several functions are available to operate on each screen that is dis- played by selecting the 4 tabs.

Device name

Bluetooth connection status

The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cel-

lular phone without touching it.

This system supports Bluetooth. Bluetooth is a wireless data sys- tem that allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls.

Before making a phone call, check the connection status, battery charge, call area and signal strength. (P. 313)

If a Bluetooth device cannot be connected, check the connection status on the phone screen. If the device is not connected, either register or reconnect it. (P. 303)

313

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Telephone switch (P. 328)

Microphone

The vehicles built in microphone is used when talking on the phone.

The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.

To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth

phone in the system. (P. 300)

Status display

You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on the phone screen.

Connection status

Signal strength

Battery charge

Indicators Conditions

Connection status Good Not connected

Battery charge Full Empty

Call area Rm: Roaming area

Signal strength Excellent Poor

314

3-2. Using the audio system

Making a call

Dialing

Display the phone screen. (P. 312)

Select the Dial Pad tab and enter a phone number.

To delete the input phone number, select . For the first digit, you can enter + by selecting for a while.

Press the switch on the steering wheel or select .

Dialing from the contacts list

You can dial a number from the contact data imported from your cel- lular phone. The system has one contact for each registered phone. Up to 2500 contacts may be stored in each contact. (P. 315)

Display the phone screen. (P. 312)

Select Contacts tab.

Choose the desired contact to call from the list.

Choose the number and then press the switch on the steering wheel or select .

Once a Bluetooth phone is registered, you can make a call using

the following procedure:

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

315

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

When the contact is empty

You can transfer the phone numbers in a Bluetooth phone to the system. Operation methods differ between PBAP (Phone Book Access Pro- file) compatible and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth phones. If the cellular phone does not support either PBAP or OPP (Object Push Profile) service, you cannot transfer contacts.

Press the switch on the steering wheel.

If the phonebook is empty, a message will be displayed.

For a PBAP compatible Bluetooth phone and Automatic Con- tact/History Transfer is off

Select the desired item.

Select to transfer new con- tacts from a cellular phone, select Always and then enable Automatic Contact/ History Transfer.

Select to transfer all the con- tacts from a connected cellular phone only once.

Select to cancel transferring.

STEP 31

STEP 2

316

3-2. Using the audio system

For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth phones

Select the desired item.

Select to transfer the contacts from the connected cellular phone.

Follow the steps in Update con- tacts from phone from STEP2. (P. 332)

Select to add a new contact manually.

Follow the steps in Registering a new contact to the contacts list from STEP2. (P. 334)

Select to cancel transferring.

Calling using favorites list

You can make a call using numbers registered in the contact.

Display the phone screen. (P. 312)

Select Favorites tab.

Select the desired number to make a call.

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

317

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Dialing from call history

You can make a call using the call history, which has the 3 functions below.

: calls which you missed

: calls which you received

: calls which you made

Display the phone screen. (P. 312)

Select Call History tab.

Select or the desired entry from the list.

When is selected

Check that the Call screen is displayed.

When the desired contact is selected

Select the desired number.

Check that the Call screen is displayed.

Call history list

If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the contact, the name is displayed in the call history.

If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in the call history.

International calls

You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile phone in use.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 4

STEP 5

318

3-2. Using the audio system

Receiving a call

To answer the phone

Press the switch on the steering wheel or select .

To refuse a call

Press the switch on the steering wheel or select .

To adjust the incoming call volume

Turn the PWR/VOL knob. You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches.

When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together

with a sound.

International calls

Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on the cellular phone in use.

319

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Speaking on the phone

To adjust the call volume

Select - or +. You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches or the volume knob.

To prevent the other party from hearing your voice

Select Mute.

Inputting tones

When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank, you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the contact.

Select 0-9.

Input the number.

The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.

STEP 1

STEP 2

320

3-2. Using the audio system

Release Tones

Release Tones appear when a continuous tone signal(s) containing a (w) is registered in the contact list.

Select Release Tones.

Release Tones

A continuous tone signal is a character string that consists of numbers and the characters p or w. (e.g.056133w0123p#1)

When the p pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after 2 seconds have elapsed. When the w pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after a user operation is performed.

Release tones can be used when automated operation of a phone based service such as an answering machine or bank phone service is desired. A phone number with continuous tone signals can be registered in the contact list.

Tone data after a w pause tone can be operated on voice command during a call.

321

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

To transfer a call

Select Handset Mode to change from a hands-free call to a cellular phone call. Select Handsfree Mode to change from a cellular phone call to a hands-free call.

Transmit volume setting

Select Transmit Volume.

Select the desired level for the transmit volume.

Select OK.

To hang up

Press the switch on the steering wheel or select .

Call waiting

When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, an incoming call message will be displayed.

To talk with the other party:

Press the switch on the steering wheel.

Select . To refuse the call:

Press the switch on the steering wheel.

Select .

Every time you press the switch on the steering wheel or select during call waiting, you will be switched to the other party.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

322

3-2. Using the audio system

Transferring calls

If you transfer from the cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.

Transfer method and operation may vary according to the cellular phone used.

For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone's manual.

Call waiting operation

Call waiting operation may differ depending on your phone company and cellular phone.

323

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Bluetooth phone message function

Displaying message inbox screen

Press the button.

Select .

Receiving a message

When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is received, the incoming message screen pops up with sound and is ready to be operated on the screen.

Select to check the message.

Select to refuse the message.

Select to call the message sender.

Received messages can be forwarded from the connected

Bluetooth phone, enabling checking and replying using the audio

system.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth phone connected, received

messages may not be transferred to the message inbox.

If the phone does not support the message function, this function

cannot be used.

STEP 1

STEP 2

324

3-2. Using the audio system

Receiving a message

Depending on the cellular phone used for receiving messages, or its reg- istration status with the audio system, some information may not be dis- played.

The pop up screen is separately available for incoming e-mail and SMS/ MMS messages under the following conditions:

E-mail:

Incoming E-mail Display is set to Full Screen. (P. 339) E-mail Notification Popup is set to on. (P. 339)

SMS/MMS:

Incoming SMS/MMS Display is set to Full screen. (P. 339) SMS/MMS Notification Popup is set to on. (P. 339)

325

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Checking the messages

Display the message inbox screen. (P. 323)

Select the desired message from the list.

Check that the message is displayed.

E-mails: Select Mark Unread or Mark Read to mark mail unread or read on the mes- sage inbox screen.

This function is available when Update Message Read Status on Phone is set to on (P. 339)

Select to make a call to the sender.

Select to have messages read out. To cancel this function, select Stop.

Select to display the previous or next message.

Select to reply the message.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

326

3-2. Using the audio system

Replying to a message

Display the message inbox screen. (P. 323)

Select the desired message from the list.

Select Quick Message.

Select the desired message.

Select Send.

Editing quick reply message

Select Quick Message.

Select corresponding to the desired message to edit.

Select OK when editing is completed.

Check the messages

Depending on the type of Bluetooth phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.

Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth

phones registered mail address folder. Select the tab of the desired folder to be displayed.

Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth phone can be dis- played.

The text of the message is not displayed while driving.

When Automatic Message Readout is set to on, messages will be auto- matically read out. (P. 339)

Turn the PWRVOL knob, or use the volume switch on the steering wheel to adjust the message read out volume.

The message read out function is available even while driving.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

327

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Calling the message sender

Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/MMS message sender's phone number.

Display the message inbox screen. (P. 323)

Select the desired message.

Select .

Check that the Call screen is displayed.

Calling from a number within a message

Calls can be made to a number identified in a message's text area.

Display the message inbox screen. (P. 323)

Select the desired message.

Select the text area.

Select corresponding to the desired number.

Check that the Call screen is displayed.

Calling from the incoming message screen

P. 321

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

328

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the steering wheel switches

Operating a telephone using the steering wheel switches

Steering wheel switches on the right hand side

Off hook switch

Make a call Receive a call Display phone screen

On hook switch

End a call Refuse a call

Steering wheel switches on the left hand side

Volume switch

Increase/Decrease the vol- ume

Press and hold: Continuously increase/ decrease the volume

Back switch

Return to the previous screen

Cursor switch

Select a list/tab Enter switch

Select an item

The steering wheel switches can be used to operate a connected cel-

lular phone.

329

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Bluetooth phone settings

Phone/Message Settings screen

To display the screen shown below, press the SETUP button, and select Phone on the Setup screen.

Set the phone connection (P. 300)

Setting the sound (P. 330)

Contact/Call History Settings (P. 331)

Set the message settings (P. 339)

Set the phone display (P. 341)

You can adjust the hands-free system to your desired settings.

330

3-2. Using the audio system

Sound setting

Display the Phone/Message Settings screen. (P. 329)

Select Sound Settings on the Phone/Message Settings screen.

Set the desired ringtone.

Adjust the ringtone volume.

Adjust the message readout volume.

Set the desired incoming SMS/MMS tone.

Adjust the incoming SMS/ MMS tone volume.

Set the incoming e-mail tone.

Adjust the incoming e-mail tone volume.

Adjust the default volume of the other party's voice.

STEP 1

STEP 2

To return to the default volume settings

Select Default, and then Yes.

331

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Contact/Call history settings

The contact can be transferred from a Bluetooth phone to the sys- tem. The contact also can be added, edited and deleted.

The call history can be deleted and contact and favorites can be changed.

Display the Phone/Message Settings screen. (P. 329)

Select Contact/Call History Settings.

Select the desired item to be set.

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth phones, select to set automatic contact/history transfer on/off. When set to on, the phones contact data and history are automatically transferred.

Select to update contacts from the connected phone. (P. 332)

Select to sort contacts by the first name or last name field.

Select to add contacts to the favorites list. (P. 336)

Select to delete contacts from the favorites list. (P. 338)

Select to display contact images.

Select to clear contacts from the call history.*

Select to add new contacts to the contact list.* (P. 334)

Select to edit contacts in the contact list.* (P. 335)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

332

3-2. Using the audio system

Select to delete contacts from the contact list.* (P. 336)

Select to reset all setup items.*

*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth

phones only, this function is avail- able when Automatic Contact/ History Transfer is set to off. (P. 331)

Update contacts from phone

Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth phones.

If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the con- tacts cannot be transferred.

For PBAP Compatible Bluetooth Phones

Select Update Contacts from Phone.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the oper- ation is complete.

This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellu- lar phone.

Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring contact data. Enter 1234 into the Bluetooth phone.

If another Bluetooth device is connected when transferring contact data, depending on the phone, the connected Bluetooth device may need to be disconnected.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.

STEP 1

STEP 2

333

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

For PBAP Incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth

Phones

Select Update Contacts from Phone.

Transfer the contact data to the system using a Bluetooth

phone.

This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellu- lar phone.

Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring contact data. Enter 1234 into the Bluetooth phone.

To cancel this function, select Cancel.

Select Done when it appears on the screen.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the oper- ation is complete.

Updating the contacts in a different way (From the Call His- tory screen)

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth phones, this function is available when Automatic Contact/History Transfer is set to off. (P. 331)

Display the phone screen. (P. 312)

Select the Call History tab and select a contact not yet regis- tered in the contact list.

Select Update Contact.

Select the desired contact.

Select a phone type for the phone number.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

334

3-2. Using the audio system

Registering a new contact to the contact list

New contact data can be registered. Up to 4 numbers per person can be registered. For PBAP compatible Bluetooth phones, this function is available when Automatic Contact/History Transfer is set to off. (P. 331)

Select New Contact.

Enter the name and select OK.

Enter the phone number and select OK.

Select the phone type for the phone number.

To add another number to this contact, select Yes.

Registering a new contact in a different way (From the Call History screen)

Display the phone screen. (P. 312)

Select the Call History tab and select a contact not yet regis- tered in the contact list.

Select Add to Contacts.

Follow the steps in Registering a new contact to the contact list from STEP 3. (P. 334)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

335

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Editing the contact data

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth phones, this function is available when Automatic Contact/History Transfer is set to off. (P. 331)

Select Edit Contact.

Select the desired contact.

Select corresponding to the desired name or number.

Follow the steps in Registering a new contact to the contact list from STEP 4. (P. 334)

Editing the contacts in a different way (From the Contact Details screen)

Display the phone screen. (P. 312)

Select the Contacts, Call History tab or the Favorites tab and select the desired contact.

Select Edit Contact.

E-mail Addresses: Select to display all registered e-mail addresses for the contact.

Follow the steps in Registering a new contact to the contact list from STEP 4. (P. 334)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

336

3-2. Using the audio system

Deleting the contact data

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth phones, this function is available when Automatic Contact/History Transfer is set to off. (P. 331)

Select Delete Contacts.

Select the desired contact and select Delete.

Select Yes when the confirmation screen appears.

Deleting the contact in a different way (From the Contact Details screen)

Display the phone screen. (P. 312)

Select the Contacts, Call History tab or the Favorites tab and select the desired contact.

Select Edit Contact.

Select Yes when the confirmation screen appears.

Favorites list setting

Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 numbers per contact) can be regis- tered in the favorites list.

Registering the contacts in the favorites list

Select Add Favorite.

Select the desired contact to add to the favorites list.

Dimmed contacts are already stored as a favorite.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the oper- ation is complete.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

337

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list

When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favor- ites list, a registered contact needs to be replaced. Select Yes when the confirmation screen appears to replace a contact.

Select the contact to be replaced.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the oper- ation is complete.

Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the Contacts screen)

Display the phone screen. (P. 312)

Select the Contacts tab.

Select at the beginning of the desired contact list name to be registered in the favorites list.

When selected, is changed to , and the contact is registered in the favorites list.

Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the Contact Details screen)

Display the phone screen. (P. 312)

Select the Contacts tab or the Call History tab and select the desired contact.

Select Add Favorite.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the oper- ation is complete.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

338

3-2. Using the audio system

Deleting the contacts in the favorites list

Select Remove Favorite.

Select the desired contacts and select Remove.

Select Yes when the confirmation screen appears.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the oper- ation is complete.

Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the Contacts screen)

Display the phone screen. (P. 312)

Select the Contacts tab.

Select at the beginning of the contact list name to be deleted from the favorites. list.

When selected, is changed to , and the data is deleted from the list.

Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the Contact Details screen)

Display the phone screen. (P. 312)

Select the Contacts, Call History tab or the Favorites tab and select the desired contact to delete.

Select Remove Favorite.

Select Yes when the confirmation screen appears.

Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the oper- ation is complete.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

339

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Message settings

Display the Phone/Message Settings screen. (P. 329)

Select Messaging Settings.

Select the desired item to be set.

Set automatic message trans- fer on/off.

Set automatic message read- out on/off.

Set the SMS/MMS notification popup on/off.

Set the e-mail notification popup on/off.

Set adding the vehicle signa- ture to outgoing messages on/ off.

Set updating message read status on phone on/off.

Change the incoming SMS/ MMS display.

Full Screen: When an SMS/ MMS message is received, the incoming SMS/MMS display screen is displayed and can be operated on the screen.

Drop-Down: When an SMS/ MMS message is received, a message is displayed on the upper side of the screen.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

340

3-2. Using the audio system

Change the incoming e-mail display.

Full Screen: When an e-mail is received, the incoming e-mail dis- play screen is the displayed and can be operated on the screen.

Drop-Down: When an e-mail is received, a message is displayed on the upper side of the screen.

Set display of messaging account names on the inbox tab on/off.

When set to on, messaging account names used on the cellu- lar phone will be displayed.

Displaying the Messaging Settings screen in a different way

Display the phone screen. (P. 312)

Select .

Select Settings.

To return to the default volume settings

Select Default, and then Yes.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

341

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Phone display settings

Display the Phone/Message Settings screen. (P. 329)

Select Phone Display Settings.

Select the desired item to be set.

Change the incoming call dis- play.

Full Screen: When a call is received, the hands-free screen is displayed and can be operated on the screen.

Drop-Down: A message is dis- played on the upper side of the screen.

Set display of the contact/his- tory transfer completion mes- sage on/off.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

342

3-2. Using the audio system

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth

device, first check the table below.

When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth device

The hands-free system or Bluetooth device does not work.

The connected device may not be a compatible Bluetooth cellular phone. For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed on

this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the following website: http://www.toyota.com/entune.html

The Bluetooth version of the connected cellular phone may be older than the specified version. Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth version 2.0 or higher (recom-

mended: Ver. 3.0 with EDR or higher). (P. 346)

343

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

When registering/connecting a cellular phone

When making/receiving a call

A cellular phone cannot be registered.

An incorrect passcode was entered on the cellular phone. Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone.

The registration operation has not been completed on the cellular phone side. Complete the registration operation on the cellular phone (approve

registration on the phone).

Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone. Delete the existing registration information from both this system

and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system. (P. 302)

A Bluetooth connection cannot be made.

Another Bluetooth device is already connected. Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to use to this system.

(P. 304)

Bluetooth function is not enabled on the cellular phone. Enable the Bluetooth function on the cellular phone.

Please check your device settings. message is displayed.

Bluetooth function is not enabled on the cellular phone. Enable the Bluetooth function on the cellular phone.

Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone. Delete the existing registration information from both this system

and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system. (P. 302)

A call cannot be made/received.

Your vehicle is in a Out of cellular service area. Please try again later. area. Move to where Out of cellular service area. Please try again later.

no longer appears on the display.

344

3-2. Using the audio system

When using the phonebook

When using the Bluetooth message function

Phonebook data cannot be transferred manually/automatically.

The profile version of the connected cellular phone may not be compatible with transferring phonebook data. For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed on

this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the following website: http://www.toyota.com/entune.html

Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to off. Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to on.

(P. 331)

Passcode has not been entered on the cellular phone. Enter the passcode on the cellular phone if requested (default pass-

code: 1234).

Transfer operation on the cellular phone has not completed. Complete transfer operation on the cellular phone (approve transfer

operation on the phone).

Phonebook data cannot be edited.

Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to on. Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to off.

(P. 331)

Messages cannot be viewed.

Message transfer is not enabled on the cellular phone. Enable message transfer on the cellular phone (approve message

transfer on the phone).

Automatic transfer function on this system is set to off. Set automatic transfer function on this system to on. (P. 339)

New message notifications are not displayed.

Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system is set to off. Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system to on.

(P. 339)

Automatic message transfer function is not enabled on the cellular phone. Enable automatic transfer function on the cellular phone.

345

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

In other situations

Even though all conceivable measures have been taken, the symptom status does not change.

The cellular phone is not close enough to this system. Bring the cellular phone closer to this system.

The cellular phone is the most likely cause of the symptom. Turn the cellular phone off, remove and reinstall the battery pack,

and then restart the cellular phone. Enable the cellular phones Bluetooth connection. Stop the cellular phones security software and close all applica-

tions. Before using an application installed on the cellular phone, carefully

check its source and how its operation might affect this system.

346

3-2. Using the audio system

Bluetooth

When using the Bluetooth audio system

In the following conditions, the system may not function.

If the portable audio player is turned off If the portable audio player is not connected If the portable audio players battery is low

There may be a delay if a cellular phone connection is made during Bluetooth audio play.

Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the system, operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.

When using the hands-free system

The audio system is muted when making a call.

If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.

If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard. If the Bluetooth phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound may deteriorate and connection status may deteriorate.

In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:

When driving on unpaved roads When driving at high speeds If a window is open If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone If there is interference from the network of the cellular phone

Conditions under which the system will not operate

If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth

If the cellular phone is turned off

If you are outside of cellular phone service coverage

If the cellular phone is not connected

If the cellular phones battery is low

When outgoing calls are controlled, due to heavy traffic on telephone lines, etc.

When the cellular phone itself cannot be used

When transferring phonebook data from the cellular phone

347

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Bluetooth antenna

The antenna is built into the display. If the portable audio player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate. If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.

Battery charge/signal status

This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player or cellular phone itself.

This system does not have a charging function.

The portable audio player or cellular phone battery will be depleted quickly when the device is connected to Bluetooth.

When using the Bluetooth audio and hands-free system at the same time

The following problems may occur.

The Bluetooth audio connection may be interrupted.

Noise may be heard during Bluetooth audio playback.

About the contact in this system

The following data is stored for every registered cellular phone. When another phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data.

Contact data

Call history

Favorite

Message

When removing a Bluetooth phone from the system, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.

348

3-2. Using the audio system

Compatible models

The Bluetooth audio system supports portable audio players with the fol- lowing specifications

Bluetooth specifications: Ver. 2.0, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0+EDR or higher)

Profiles:

A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher) This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sound to the audio system.

AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher) This is a profile to allow remote control the A/V equipment.

However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable audio player connected.

The hands-free system supports cellular phones with the following specifica- tions.

Bluetooth specification: Ver. 2.0, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0+EDR or higher)

Profiles:

HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.6 or higher) This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using a cellular phone or head set. It has outgoing and incoming call functions.

OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2) This is a profile to transfer phonebook data. When a Bluetooth com- patible cellular phone has both PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used.

PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.1) This is a profile to transfer contact data.

MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher This is a profile to using phone message.

If the cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot register it with the hands-free system. OPP, PBAP or MAP services must be selected individu- ally.

349

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Reconnecting the portable audio player

If the portable audio player is disconnected due to poor reception when the POWER switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the portable audio player.

If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instruc- tions below to reconnect:

Select the portable audio player again

Enter the portable audio player

When you sell your car

Be sure to delete your personal data. (P. 263)

CAUTION

While driving

Do not use the portable audio player, cellular phone or connect a device to the Bluetooth system.

Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable dis- tance between themselves and the Bluetooth antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.

Before using Bluetooth devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should con- sult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

NOTICE

When leaving the vehicle

Do not leave your portable audio player or cellular phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the portable audio player or cellular phone.

350

3-2. Using the audio system

Voice command system

Using the voice command system

Press the talk switch.

To cancel the voice command system, press and hold the talk switch.

After a beep sounds, say the desired command.

On the list screen, you can select the desired command.

The voice command system enables the hands-free system to be

operated using voice commands.

Operations of the voice command system can be performed by

selecting the menu corresponding to each function on the screen.

Even if any menu is selected, commands displayed on all menus can

be operated.

STEP 1

Microphone

P. 313

When using the microphone

It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a command.

When Voice Prompt Interrupt set to on, it is not necessary to wait for the confirmation beep before speaking a command. (P. 267)

STEP 2

351

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Casual speech recognization

Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system enables recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However, the system cannot recognize every variation of each command.

In some situations, it is possible to omit the command for the proce- dure and directly state the desired operation.

Not all voice commands are displayed in the short cut menu.

This function is available in English, Spanish and French.

Expression examples for each function

Voice commands may not be recognized if:

Spoken too quickly. Spoken at a low or high volume. The roof or windows are open. Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken. The air conditioning speed is set high. The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone.

In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command properly and using voice commands may not be possible:

The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize.

There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise.

Command Expression examples

Call

Get me . Dial on his phone.

Dial Dial <3334445555>. Ring <3334445555>.

352

3-2. Using the audio system

Command list

Some recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below as examples.

Basic

Phone

Command Action

Help Prompts voice guidance to offer examples of com- mands or operation methods

Go Back Returns to the previous screen

Command Action

Redial Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgoing call

Call Back Places a call to the phone number of latest incom- ing call

Show Recent Calls

Displays the call history screen

Dial

Places a call to the said phone number

Call

Place a call to the said phone type of the contact from the phone book

353

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Rear view monitor system

The rear view image is displayed when the shift position is in R and the POWER switch is in ON mode.

The rear view monitor system will be deactivated when the shift lever is in any position other than R.

The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying guide

lines and an image of the view behind the vehicle while backing up,

for example while parking.

The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.

354

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the rear view monitor system

Screen description

Vehicle width guide lines

The line indicates a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up. The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.

Distance guide line

The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (blue) from the edge of the bumper.

Vehicle center guide lines

These lines indicate the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

Distance guide line

The line shows points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the center of the edge of the bumper.

355

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Rear view monitor system precautions

Area displayed on screen

The rear view monitor system displays an image of the view from the bumper of the rear area of the vehicle.

To adjust the image on the rear view monitor system screen. (P. 265)

The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions.

Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.

The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance.

Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed by the monitor.

Corners of bumper

356

3-2. Using the audio system

Rear view monitor system camera

The camera for the rear view monitor system is located above the license plate.

Using the camera

If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water droplets, snow or mud adhere to the lens, rinse it with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse.

Differences between the screen and the actual road

The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.

The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road sur- faces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the fixed guide lines on the screen and the actual dis- tance/course on the road.

357

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on the road.

When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be further from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual distance/course on the road.

358

3-2. Using the audio system

When any part of the vehicle sags

When any part of the vehicle sags due to the number of pas- sengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin of error between the fixed guide lines on the screen and the actual dis- tance/course on the road.

When approaching three-dimensional objects

The distance guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the posi- tion of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the dis- tance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.

Distance guidelines

Visually check the surround- ings and the area behind the vehicle. On the screen, it appears that a truck is parked at point . However, in reality if you back up to point , you will hit the truck. On the screen, it appears that is closest and is furthest away. However, in reality, the distance to and is the same, and is farther than

and .

359

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Vehicle width guide lines

Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. In the case shown below, the truck appears to be outside of the vehi- cle width guide lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over the vehicle width guide lines. In reality if you back up as guided by the vehicle width guide lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.

Vehicle width guide lines

360

3-2. Using the audio system

Things you should know

If you notice any symptoms

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution, and re-check.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Likely cause Solution

The image is difficult to see

The vehicle is in a dark area The temperature around the lens

is either high or low The outside temperature is low There are water droplets on the

camera It is raining or humid Foreign matter (mud etc.) is

adhering to the camera There are scratches on the cam-

era Sunlight or headlights are shining

directly into the camera The vehicle is under fluorescent

lights, sodium lights, mercury lights etc.

If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunction. Back up while visually checking the vehicles surroundings. (Use the monitor again once conditions have been improved.) To adjust the image on the rear view monitor system screen. (P. 265)

The image is blurry

Dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering to the camera.

Rinse the camera lens with water and wipe it clean with a soft cloth. Wash with a mild soap if the dirt is stubborn.

The image is out of alignment

The camera or surrounding area has received a strong impact.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

361

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

The fixed guide lines are very far out of alignment

The vehicle is tilted (there is a heavy load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low due to a tire punc- ture, etc.)

The vehicle is used on an incline.

If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a mal- function. Back up while visually checking the vehicle's surround- ings.

The camera position is out of align- ment.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Likely cause Solution

362

3-2. Using the audio system

CAUTION

When using the rear view monitor system

The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when backing up. When backing up, be sure to check visually behind and all around the vehicle before proceeding.

Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries.

Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up. The image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may differ from the actual state. Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.

Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.

The instructions given are only guidelines. When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traf- fic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when park- ing. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view monitor system.

When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your vehicle before maneuvering into it.

Do not use the rear view monitor system in the following cases:

On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow When using tire chains or the compact spare tire When the trunk lid is not closed completely On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.

In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to check direct visually and with the mirrors all around the vehicle before proceeding.

If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixed guide lines displayed on the screen may change.

The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances.

363

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Inte rior fe

atures

NOTICE

How to use the camera

The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following cases.

If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change.

As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disas- semble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.

Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If the camera lens is scratched, it cannot transmit a clear image.

Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.

When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunc- tioning.

When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium light or mer- cury light etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.

Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunc- tion. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

364

3-3. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Interior/rear personal lights (vehicles with moon roof) (P. 365, 366)

Interior light (vehicles without moon roof) (P. 365, 366)

Interior/front personal lights (vehicles with moon roof) or per- sonal lights (vehicles without moon roof) (P. 365, 366)

Shift lever light (when the tail lights are on) (vehicles with moon roof)

POWER switch light

Door courtesy lights

365

3-3. Using the interior lights

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Interior lights

Vehicles without moon roof

Turns the lights on

Turns the door position on

Turns the lights off

Vehicles with moon roof

Turns the lights on/off linked to door positions.

Turns the lights on/off

Interior lights

366

3-3. Using the interior lights

Personal lights

Front

Turns the lights on/off

Rear (vehicles with moon roof)

Turns the lights on/off

Illuminated entry system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to POWER switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed.

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

If the interior lights, personal lights and/or door courtesy lights are left on when the POWER switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 576)

Personal lights

367

3

Inte rior fe

atures

3-4. Using the storage features

List of storage features

CAUTION

Items that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items.

Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

Auxiliary boxes

Glove box

Bottle holders/door pockets

Cup holders

Console box

Coin holder

368

3-4. Using the storage features

Glove box

The glove box can be opened by pressing the lock release button, locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.

Open

Lock

Unlock

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerv- ing, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the items stored inside.

Glove box

369

3-4. Using the storage features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Console box

Lift the lid while pulling up the lever to release the lock.

When using the console box lid as an armrest

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Keep the console box closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open console box or the items stored inside.

Slide the console box lid forward as needed. Slide the lid forward while pulling up the lever.

The lid can also be opened from the for- wardmost position.

Console box

370

3-4. Using the storage features

Coin holder

Pull the lid down while pressing down the button.

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Keep the coin holder closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open coin holder or the items stored inside.

Coin holder

371

3-4. Using the storage features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Bottle holders

Front

Rear

When using the holder as a bottle holder

When storing a bottle, close the cap.

The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.

CAUTION

Items unsuitable for the bottle holder

Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.

Bottle holders

372

3-4. Using the storage features

Cup holders

Front

Rear

Pull the armrest down.

NOTICE

Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders

Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bot- tle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break.

Bottle holders and cup holders

373

3-4. Using the storage features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Cup holder insert

CAUTION

Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

Cup holder insert can be removed.

Cup holders

374

3-4. Using the storage features

Auxiliary boxes

Type A

Push the lid.

Type B

Push the lid.

Type C (if equipped)

Lift the lid.

Auxiliary boxes

375

3-4. Using the storage features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Keep the auxiliary boxes closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open auxiliary box or the items stored inside.

Items unsuitable for storing (type A only)

Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg). Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall out, resulting in an accident.

Auxiliary boxes

376

3-5. Other interior features

Sun visors

To set the visor in the for- ward position, flip it down.

To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side.

To use the side extender, place the visor in the side position, then slide it back- ward.

377

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Vanity mirrors

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge (vehicles with vanity lights)

If the vanity lights remain on for 20 minutes while the hybrid system is off, the lights will turn off automatically.

Slide the cover to open.

Vehicles with vanity lights: The light turns on when the cover is opened.

378

3-5. Other interior features

Clock

The clock is displayed when

The POWER switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

When the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.

Adjusts the hours

Adjusts the minutes

379

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Outside temperature display

The outside temperature is displayed when

The POWER switch is in ON mode.

Display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis- played, or the display may take longer than normal to change:

When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 16 mph [25 km/h])

When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/ exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

When E is displayed

The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

The temperature display shows temperatures within the range of

-40F (-40C) and 122F (50C).

380

3-5. Other interior features

Ashtray

CAUTION

When not in use

Keep the ashtray closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open ashtray or ash flying out.

To prevent fire

Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.

Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.

An ashtray can be installed in the cup holder. (P. 372)

: If equipped

381

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Power outlets

The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less

than 10 A.

Instrument cluster

382

3-5. Other interior features

The power outlet can be used when

The POWER switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.

NOTICE

To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir- cuit.

To prevent blown fuse

Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

Center console (if equipped)

383

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Seat heaters

The seat heaters can be used when

The POWER switch is in ON mode.

When not in use

Move the dial fully backward. The indicator light turns off.

On

The indicator light comes on.

Adjusts the seat tempera- ture

The further you move the dial forward, the warmer the seat becomes.

Drivers seat Front

passengers seat

: If equipped

384

3-5. Other interior features

CAUTION

Burns

Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal- lenged

Persons with sensitive skin Persons who are fatigued Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping

drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater. Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.

Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause minor burns or overheating.

NOTICE

To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Turn the seat heaters off when the hybrid system is off.

385

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Armrest

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not apply too much load on the armrest.

Fold down the armrest for use.

386

3-5. Other interior features

Assist grips

CAUTION

Assist grip

Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the assist grip

Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.

An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your

body while sitting on the seat.

387

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Coat hooks

CAUTION

Items that cannot be hung on the coat hook

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury.

388

3-5. Other interior features

Floor mat

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same

model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place

onto the carpet.

Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eye- lets.

Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place.

*: Always align the marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

STEP 1

*

STEP 2

389

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.

When installing the driver's floor mat

Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.

Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.

Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro- vided.

Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.

Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

Before driving

Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.

With the hybrid system stopped and the shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

390

3-5. Other interior features

Trunk features

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hooks

Do not apply too much load to the hooks.

Grocery bag hooks

391

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Garage door opener

The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufac- tured under license from HomeLink.

Programming HomeLink (for U.S. owners)

The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device.

Buttons

Indicator

The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage

doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, secu-

rity systems, and other devices.

: If equipped

392

3-5. Other interior features

Programming the HomeLink

Point the remote control trans- mitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink

control buttons.

Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming.

Press and hold one of the HomeLink buttons and the transmitter button. When the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash, you can release both but- tons.

If the HomeLink indicator light comes on but does not flash, or flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and remains lit, the HomeLink button is already programmed. Use the other buttons or follow the Reprogramming a HomeLink

button instructions. (P. 395)

STEP 1

STEP 2

393

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Test the HomeLink operation by pressing the newly pro- grammed button.

If a HomeLink button has been programmed for a garage door, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your remote control transmitter is of the rolling code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink

button. The remote control trans- mitter is of the rolling code type if the HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmit- ter is of the rolling code type, pro- ceed to the heading Programming a rolling code sys- tem.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.

Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S. owners)

If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading Programming HomeLink before proceeding with the steps listed below.

Locate the learn button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener motor.

Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener motor for the location of the learn button.

Press the learn button.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

394

3-5. Other interior features

Press and hold the vehicles programmed HomeLink button for 2 seconds and then release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage door may open.

If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recog- nize the HomeLink signal and operate the garage door.

Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code sys- tem for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.

Programming an entry gate (for U.S. owners)/Programming a device in the Canadian market

Place the remote control transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the HomeLink buttons.

Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming.

Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.

Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the remote control transmitter for 2 seconds each until step 4 is completed.

When the HomeLink indicator light starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons.

Test the HomeLink operation by pressing the newly pro- grammed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your Toyota dealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the Reprogramming a HomeLink button instructions.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

395

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Operating HomeLink

Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator light should come on.

The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

Reprogramming a HomeLink button

Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. After 20 seconds, the HomeLink indicator light will start flashing slowly. Keep pressing the HomeLink button and press and hold the transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash. Release the buttons.

Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs)

Press and hold the 2 outside but- tons for 10 seconds until the indi- cator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink memory.

396

3-5. Other interior features

Before programming

Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.

The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLinkbutton.

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

HomeLink will turn off if a door has not been opened and closed for 20 min- utes or the POWER switch is left turned off. (After which programming can- not be completed.) Open and close a door or turn the POWER switch to ACCESSORY mode to turn HomeLink on. We recommend programming while the POWER switch is in ACCESSORY mode.

Certification for the garage door opener

U.S.A. FCC ID: CB2051AHL4/CB251AHL4NR

NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Canada IC ID: 051AHL4/51AHL4NR

NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ- ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

When support is necessary

Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

397

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

CAUTION

When programming a garage door or other remote control devices

The garage door or other devices may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.

Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

398

3-5. Other interior features

Compass

The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in

which the vehicle is heading.

Operation

To turn the compass on or off, press AUTO for more than 3 seconds.

Displays and directions

Display Direction

N North

NE Northeast

E East

SE Southeast

S South

SW Southwest

W West

NW Northwest

: If equipped

399

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Calibrating the compass

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earths magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies depending on the geographic position of the vehicle.

If you cross over one of the map boundaries shown in illustration, the compass will deviate. To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to Deviation calibra- tion.

Deviation calibration

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold AUTO.

A number (1 to 15) appears on the compass display.

STEP 1

STEP 2

400

3-5. Other interior features

Referring to the map above, press AUTO to select the num- ber of the zone you are in.

If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.

Circling calibration

When C appears on the dis- play, drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed.

If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until a direction is dis- played.

STEP 3

Conditions unfavorable to correct operation

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).

The vehicle has become magnetized. (There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)

The battery has been disconnected.

A door is open.

401

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

CAUTION

While driving the vehicle

Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

When doing the circling calibration

Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the vicinity. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

NOTICE

To avoid compass malfunctions

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror. Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction.

To ensure normal operation of the compass

Do not perform a circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.

During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power win- dows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

402

3-5. Other interior features

Safety Connect

Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses

Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular tech-

nology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety

Connect is supported by Toyotas designated response center,

which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.

Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select,

telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.

By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound

by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and

Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current

copy of which is available at Toyota.com. All use of the Safety Con-

nect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Condi-

tions.

System components

Microphone

LED light indicators

SOS button

: If equipped

403

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Services

Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services avail- able:

Automatic Collision Notification* Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (P. 405)

*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2

Stolen Vehicle Location Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 406)

Emergency Assistance Button (SOS) Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 406)

Enhanced Roadside Assistance Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 406)

Subscription

After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services. A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Toyota dealer, call 1-800-331-4331, or push the SOS but- ton in your vehicle for further subscription details.

404

3-5. Other interior features

Safety Connect Services Information

Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth technology will not be possible during Safety Connect.

Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Toyota models. Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection avail- ability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enroll- ment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term selected.

Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle Location, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in countries other than Canada.

Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecom- munications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.

Languages

The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.

When contacting the response center

You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.

405

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Safety Connect LED light Indicators

When the POWER switch is turned to ON mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indi- cator light comes on, indicating that the service is active. The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:

Green indicator light on = Active service

Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process

Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunc- tion (contact your Toyota dealer)

No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active

Safety Connect services

Automatic Collision Notification

In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicles location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emer- gency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location.

406

3-5. Other interior features

Stolen Vehicle Location

If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local author- ities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After fil- ing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1- 800-331-4331 and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service. In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Toyota.com.

Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)

In the event of an emergency on the road, push the SOS button to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your vehicles location, assess the emer- gency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.

If you accidentally press the SOS button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency.

Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Toyota roadside service.

Subscribers can press the SOS button to reach a Safety Connect response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Enhanced Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Toyota.com.

407

3-5. Other interior features

3

Inte rior fe

atures

Safety information for Safety Connect

Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.

Exposure to radio frequency signals

The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.

In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wire- less phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety stan- dards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.

ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]

NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measure- ment) Report 86 [1986]

ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]

Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic eval- uations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).

The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.

408

3-5. Other interior features

Certification for Safety Connect

FCC ID: O9EGTM1

FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101

NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Maintenance and care 4

409

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior......... 410

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior.......... 413

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements.................. 416

General maintenance....... 418

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs........................ 422

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions .................... 423

Hood ................................ 426

Positioning a floor jack ..... 427

Engine compartment........ 429

12-volt battery .................. 439

Tires ................................. 443

Tire inflation pressure ...... 449

Wheels ............................. 453

Air conditioning filter......... 456

Electronic key battery....... 458

Checking and replacing fuses .............................. 460

Light bulbs........................ 471

410

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Automatic car washes

Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.

Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicles paint.

Vehicles with rear spoiler: In certain automatic car washes, the rear spoiler may interfere with machine operation. This may prevent the vehi- cle from being cleaned properly or result in damage to the rear spoiler.

High pressure car washes

Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows.

Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime

condition:

Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.

For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor- oughly with water.

Wipe away any water.

Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

411

4-1. Maintenance and care

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

When using a car wash

If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effec- tive range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (P. 57)

Aluminum wheels (if equipped)

Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for long distance in the hot weather.

Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.

Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

CAUTION

When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.

Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

Precaution regarding the Blind Spot Monitor

If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may mal- function. If this occurs, consult your Toyota dealer.

412

4-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE

To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo- nents (aluminum wheels etc.)

Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

After driving near the sea coast After driving on salted roads If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the

paint surface After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,

iron powder or chemical substances If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.

Cleaning the exterior lights

Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

413

4-1. Maintenance and care

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and

keep it in top condition:

Protecting the vehicle interior

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur- faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

Cleaning the leather areas

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool deter- gent.

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain- ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and venti- lated area.

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.

Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth.

Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

414

4-1. Maintenance and care

Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.

Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

CAUTION

Water in the vehicle

Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid battery (traction battery) air vent, and in the trunk. Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to mal- function or catch fire.

Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (P. 114) An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

415

4-1. Maintenance and care

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

NOTICE

Cleaning detergents

Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehi- cle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:

Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach

Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alco- hol

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior parts painted surface may be damaged.

Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces:

Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.

Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the uphol- stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

Cleaning the inside of the rear window

Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.

Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

416

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the war- ranty coverage.

Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)

After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the maintenance data. To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular

maintenance are essential. It is the owners responsibility to perform

regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance:

General maintenance

General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.

Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified inter- vals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.

Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war- ranty coverage.

The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, see the separate Owners War- ranty Information Booklet or Owners Manual Supplement.

417

4-2. Maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Turn the POWER switch off with the trip meter A reading shown. (P. 176)

While pressing the display change button (P. 174), turn the POWER switch to ON mode.

Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays 000000.

Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer

Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.

Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.

Handling of the 12-volt battery

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor- nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 439)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

418

4-2. Maintenance

General maintenance

Engine compartment

Trunk

Items Check points

Brake fluid Is the brake fluid at the correct level? (P. 436)

Coolant Is the coolant at the correct level?

(P. 434)

Engine oil Is the engine oil at the correct level? (P. 430)

Exhaust system There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.

Radiator/condenser The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects. (P. 436)

Washer fluid Is there sufficient washer fluid?

(P. 438)

Items Check points

12-volt battery Check the connections. (P. 439)

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be per-

formed at the intervals specified in the Owner's Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet or Owners Manual Supplement/Scheduled

Maintenance Guide. It is recommended that any problem you notice

should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified

service shop for advice.

419

4-2. Maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Vehicle interior

Items Check points

Accelerator pedal The accelerator pedal should

move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).

Brake pedal

Does the brake pedal move smoothly?

Does the brake pedal have appro- priate clearance from the floor?

(P. 557) Does the brake pedal have the

correct amount of free play? (P. 557)

Brakes

The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied.

The brakes should work effec- tively.

The brake pedal should not feel spongy.

The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.

Head restraints (front seat) Do the head restraints move

smoothly and lock securely?

Hybrid transmission Park mech- anism

When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?

Indicators/buzzers Do the indicators and buzzers

function properly?

Lights Do all the lights come on?

Parking brake

Does the parking brake pedal move smoothly?

When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?

420

4-2. Maintenance

Seat belts

Do the seat belts operate smoothly?

The seat belts should not be dam- aged.

Seats Do the seat controls operate

properly?

Steering wheel

Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?

Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of free play?

There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel.

Items Check points

421

4-2. Maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Vehicle exterior

Items Check points

Doors/trunk Do the doors and trunk operate

smoothly?

Engine hood Does the engine hood lock sys-

tem work properly?

Fluid leaks There should not be any signs of

fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.

Tires

Is the tire inflation pressure cor- rect?

The tires should not be dam- aged or excessively worn.

Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?

The wheel nuts should not be loose.

Windshield wipers

The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deforma- tion.

The wiper blades should clear the windshield without streaking or skipping.

CAUTION

If the hybrid system is operating

Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

422

4-2. Maintenance

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which

include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system moni-

tors the operation of the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/ M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situa- tions:

When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.

When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a tempo- rary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

423

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct

procedures as given in these sections.

Items Parts and tools

12-volt battery condition (P. 439)

Grease Conventional wrench

(for terminal clamp bolts)

Brake fluid level (P. 436)

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Rag or paper towel Funnel (used only for adding

brake fluid)

Engine/power control unit coolant level (P. 434)

Toyota Super Long Life Coolant or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non- amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology For the U.S.A.: Toyota Super Long Life Coolant is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. For Canada: Toyota Super Long Life Coolant is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.

Funnel (used only for adding cool- ant)

424

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Items Parts and tools

Engine oil level P. 430)

Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent

Rag or paper towel Funnel (used only for adding

engine oil)

Fuses (P. 460) Fuse with same amperage rating

as original

Light bulbs (P. 471)

Bulb with same number and watt- age rating as original

Phillips-head screwdriver Flathead screwdriver Wrench

Radiators and condenser (P. 436)

Tire inflation pressure (P. 449) Tire pressure gauge Compressed air source

Washer fluid (P. 438)

Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

425

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

CAUTION

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions:

When working on the engine compartment

Make sure that the READY indicator is off.

Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fans and engine drive belt.

Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flammable.

When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille

Be sure the POWER switch is off. With the POWER switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may auto- matically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant tempera- ture is high. (P. 436)

Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes.

NOTICE

If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air.

426

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Hood

CAUTION

Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

Pull the hood release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.

STEP 1

STEP 2

427

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Positioning a floor jack

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack cor-

rectly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

Front

Rear

CTY43AV171

428

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

When raising your vehicle

Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury:

When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the jack.

Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.

Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is sup- ported only by the floor jack.

Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface.

Do not start the hybrid system while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.

Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.

Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point. Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.

Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.

When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the floor jack.

Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as the one shown in the illustra- tion.

429

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Engine compartment

Fuse box (P. 460)

Engine oil filler cap (P. 431)

Engine oil level dipstick (P. 430)

Brake fluid reservoir (P. 436)

Engine coolant radiator (P. 436)

Power control unit coolant radiator (P. 436)

Condenser (P. 436)

Electric cooling fans

Engine coolant reservoir (P. 434)

Washer fluid tank (P. 438)

Power control unit coolant reservoir (P. 434)

430

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

Checking the engine oil

Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

Low

Normal

Excessive

The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

431

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

Engine oil selection P. 553

Oil quantity (Low Full)

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.)

Items Clean funnel

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

432

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the follow- ing situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.

When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine

If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used

When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently

When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic

CAUTION

Used engine oil

Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

433

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

NOTICE

To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

When replacing the engine oil

Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.

Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

434

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Coolant

Engine coolant reservoir

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the F and L lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

F line

L line

If the level is on or below the L line, add coolant up to the F line. (P. 542)

Power control unit coolant reservoir

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the FULL and LOW lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.

Reservoir cap

FULL line

LOW line

If the level is on or below the LOW line, add coolant up to the FULL line. (P. 544)

435

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Coolant selection

Only use Toyota Super Long Life Coolant or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.: Toyota Super Long Life Coolant is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31F [-35C])

Canada: Toyota Super Long Life Coolant is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44F [-42C])

For more details about coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiators, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reser- voir caps, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling systems.

CAUTION

When the hybrid system is hot

Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

436

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Radiators and condenser

Check the radiators and condenser and clear away any foreign objects. If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Brake fluid

Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be between the MAX and MIN lines on the tank.

MAX

MIN

Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.

CAUTION

When the hybrid system is hot

Do not touch the radiators or condenser as they may be hot and cause seri- ous injuries, such as burns.

Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Item Clean funnel

437

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

CAUTION

When filling the reservoir

Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE

If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

438

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Washer fluid

Add washer fluid in the following situations.

Any washer does not work.

The warning message appears on the multi-informa- tion display.

CAUTION

When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the hybrid sys- tem etc.

NOTICE

Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicles painted surfaces.

Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot- tle.

439

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

12-volt battery

Location

The 12-volt battery is located on the right-hand side of the luggage compartment.

Removing the 12-volt battery cover

Remove the 12-volt battery cover.

Installing the 12-volt battery cover

Install the cover

Lift the tab to secure to the trunk liner

440

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Before recharging

When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flam- mable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging:

If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.

Exterior

Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

441

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery

Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.

Start the hybrid system with the POWER switch in ACCESSORY mode. The hybrid system may not start with the POWER switch turned off. However, the hybrid system will operate normally from the second attempt.

The POWER switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt bat- tery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the POWER switch mode to the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the power before disconnect the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12-volt battery if the POWER switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.

If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Chemicals in the 12-volt battery

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12-volt battery:

Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools.

Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery.

Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery.

Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.

Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery

Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.

442

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

How to recharge the 12-volt battery

Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.

Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi- ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth- ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

If you accidentally swallow electrolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

When replacing the 12-volt battery

Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause gas (hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explo- sion.

For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

When recharging the 12-volt battery

Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

443

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-

ules and treadwear.

Checking tires

New tread

Treadwear indicator

Worn tread

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the TWI or marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.

Check spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recom- mends that tire rotation is carried out at the same inter- val as tire inspection.

Tire pressure warning system (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 493)

Front

444

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warn- ing computer. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer.

Registering ID codes

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Toyota dealer.

445

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

When to replace your vehicles tires

Tires should be replaced if:

You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage

A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.

Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (P. 564)

446

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire types

Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con- struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 229)

If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

447

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Certification for the tire pressure warning system

FCC ID: PAXPMVC010

FCC ID: HYQ23AAD

NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi- ble for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equip- ment.

CAUTION

When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.

Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).

Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.

Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle. Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

448

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE

Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pres- sure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.

When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.

To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit- ters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 444)

Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot- holes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicles wheels and body.

If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

449

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 558)

450

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare.

Inspection and adjustment procedure

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.

If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

Put the tire valve cap back on.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

451

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

Reduced fuel efficiency

Reduced driving comfort and tire life

Reduced safety

Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

Check only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire infla- tion pressure that is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality and handling.

Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.

Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

452

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:

Excessive wear

Uneven wear

Poor handling

Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

Poor sealing of the tire bead

Wheel deformation and/or tire separation

A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE

When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost, replace them as soon as possible.

453

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be

replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or

cause a loss of handling control.

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and inset*. Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

*: Conventionally referred to as offset.

Toyota does not recommend using the following:

Wheels of different sizes or types

Used wheels

Bent wheels that have been straightened

Aluminum wheel precautions (if equipped)

Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.

When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).

Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and use a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

454

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

When replacing wheels (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys- tem)

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and trans- mitters must be installed. (P. 444)

CAUTION

When replacing wheels

Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owners Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.

Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or seri- ous injury.

When installing the wheel nuts

Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered ends facing inward. Installing the nuts with the tapered ends facing outward can cause the wheel to break and eventually cause the wheel to come off while driving, which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Tapered portion

455

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

NOTICE

Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn- ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Toyota dealer.

Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

456

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air

conditioning efficiency.

Removal method

Turn the POWER switch off.

Open the glove box and remove the glove box cover inside the glove box.

Remove the filter cover.

Replacement method

Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.

The UP marks shown on the filter should be pointing up.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

457

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.)

If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed. Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

458

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

You will need the following items:

Flathead screwdriver

Small flathead screwdriver

Lithium battery CR2032

Replacing the battery

Take out the mechanical key.

Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Remove the depleted battery using a small flathead screw- driver.

Insert a new battery with the + terminal facing up.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

459

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Use a CR2032 lithium battery

Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appli- ance shops or camera stores.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.

Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

If the key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function prop- erly.

The operational range will be reduced.

CAUTION

Removed battery and other parts

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.

Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

460

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have

blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Turn the POWER switch off.

Open the fuse box cover.

Engine compartment (type A fuse box)

Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.

Engine compartment (type B fuse box)

Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.

Under the instrument panel

Remove the lid.

STEP 1

STEP 2

461

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

After a system failure, see Fuse layout and amperage rat- ings (P. 462) for details about which fuse to check.

Remove the fuse.

Only type A fuse can be removed using the pullout tool.

Check if the fuse has blown.

Type A

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amper- age rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type B

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amper- age rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

462

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse layout and amperage ratings

Engine compartment (type A fuse box)

Fuse block

Type C

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact your Toyota dealer.

463

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Fuse block on the back of the cover

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 METER-IG2 5 A Gauge and meters

2 FAN 50 A Electric cooling fans

3 H-LP CLN 30 A No circuit

4 ENG W/PMP 30 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

5 PTC HTR NO.2 50 A PTC heater

6 PTC HTR NO.1 50 A PTC heater

7 HTR 50 A Air conditioning system

8 DC/DC 120 A Hybrid system

9 ABS NO.1 30 A Electronically controlled brake sys- tem

10 H-LP-MAIN 30 A H-LP LH-LO, H-LP RH-LO, MNL H- LP LVL, headlight (low beam)

11 ABS MTR NO.2 50 A Electronically controlled brake sys- tem

12 ABS MTR NO.1 50 A Electronically controlled brake sys- tem

464

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

13 R/B NO.2 50 A IGCT-MAIN, INV W/PMP

14 EPS 80 A Electric power steering

15 S-HORN 7.5 A S-HORN

16 DEICER 15 A No circuit

17 HORN 10 A Horns

18 EFI NO.2 15 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

19 EFI NO.3 7.5 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

20 INJ 7.5 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

21 ECU-IG2 NO.3 7.5 A

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, steering lock system, hybrid system

22 IGN 15 A Starter system

23 D/L-AM2 20 A No circuit

24 IG2-MAIN 25 A IGN, INJ, METER-IG2, ECU-IG2 NO.3, A/B, ECU-IG2 NO.2, ECU- IG2 NO.1

25 DC/DC-S 7.5 A Hybrid system

26 MAYDAY 5 A MAYDAY

27 TURN&HAZ 15 A Turn signal lights, emergency flashers, gauge and meters

28 STRG LOCK 10 A Steering lock system

29 AMP 15 A Audio system

30 H-LP LH-LO 15 A*1

Left-hand headlight (low beam) 20 A*2

Fuse Ampere Circuit

465

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

*1: Vehicles with halogen headlight *2: Vehicles with discharge headlight

31 H-LP RH-LO 15 A*1

Right-hand headlight (low beam) 20 A*2

32 MNL H-LP LVL*2 7.5 A Manual headlight leveling system

33 EFI-MAIN NO.1 30 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, EFI NO.2, EFI NO.3

34 SMART 5 A Smart key system

35 ETCS 10 A Electronic throttle control system

36 ABS NO.2 7.5 A Electronically controlled brake sys- tem

37 EFI NO.1 7.5 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

38 EFI-MAIN NO.2 20 A A/F sensor

39 AM2 7.5 A Hybrid system

40 RADIO-B 20 A Audio system, navigation system

41 DOME 7.5 A Clock, vanity lights, interior lights, personal lights, trunk light, door courtesy lights

42 ECU-B NO.1 10 A

Smart key system, gauge and meters, Blind Spot Monitor, steer- ing sensor, occupant classification system, multiplex communication system

43 SPARE 25 A Spare fuse

44 SPARE 30 A Spare fuse

Fuse Ampere Circuit

466

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment (type B fuse box)

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 PM IGCT 7.5 A Hybrid system, electronic con- trolled transmission

2 BATT VL SSR 10 A Hybrid system

3 INV 7.5 A Hybrid system

4 DC/DC IGCT 10 A Hybrid system

5 INV W/PMP RLY

7.5 A Hybrid system

6 BATT FAN 7.5 A Battery cooling fan

7 INV W/PMP 15 A Hybrid system

8 IGCT-MAIN 25 A DC/DC IGCT, INV, BATT VL SSR, PM IGCT, INV W/PMP RLY, BATT FAN

467

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Under the instrument panel

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 ECU-IG1 NO.2 10 A

Shift lock control system, seat heaters, smart key system, tire pressure warning system, multiplex communication system, audio sys- tem, navigation system, moon roof, auto anti-glare inside rear view mir- ror, air conditioning system

2 ECU-IG1 NO.1 10 A

Electronically controlled brake sys- tem, electric cooling fans, stop lights, steering sensor, Vehicle Proximity Notification System, rear window defogger, outside rear view mirror defogger, back-up lights, audio system, navigation system

3 PANEL 10 A

Switch illumination, air condition- ing system, shift lever light, glove box light, audio system, navigation system, personal lights, interior lights

4 TAIL 15 A Parking lights, side marker lights, tail lights, license plate lights, fog lights

468

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

5 EPS-IG1 7.5 A Electric power steering

6 ECU-IG1 NO.3 7.5 A Blind Spot Monitor

7 S/HTR&FAN F/L

10 A Seat heaters

8 H-LP LVL 7.5 A No circuit

9 WASHER 10 A Windshield wipers and washer

10 A/C-IG1 7.5 A Air conditioning system, PTC heater

11 WIPER 25 A Windshield wipers and washer

12 BKUP LP 7.5 A No circuit

13 DOOR NO.1 30 A Power windows

14 WIPER-S 5 A No circuit

15 P/OUTLET RR 20 A Power outlet

16 SFT LOCK- ACC

5 A No circuit

17 DOOR R/R 20 A Rear right-hand power windows

18 DOOR R/L 20 A Rear left-hand power windows

19 OBD 10 A On-board diagnosis system

20 ECU-B NO.2 10 A Smart key system, tire pressure warning system

21 DOOR NO.2 20 A Power windows

22 AM1 7.5 A No circuit

23 STOP 7.5 A

Tail lights, electronically controlled brake system, high mounted stop- light, shift lock control system, hybrid system, Vehicle Proximity Notification System

24 P/SEAT RR 30 A No circuit

25 A/C-B 7.5 A Air conditioning system

Fuse Ampere Circuit

469

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

26 S/ROOF 10 A Moon roof

27 P/SEAT FR 30 A Power seats

28 PSB 30 A No circuit

29 D/L-AM1 20 A Multiplex communication system, power door lock, trunk opener switch

30 TI&TE 20 A No circuit

31 A/B 10 A Occupant classification system, SRS airbag system

32 ECU-IG2 NO.1 7.5 A Hybrid system

33 ECU-IG2 NO.2 7.5 A Electronically controlled brake sys- tem, smart key system

34 CIG&P/ OUTLET

15 A Power outlet

35 ECU-ACC 7.5 A Clock, outside rear view mirrors, multiplex communication system, audio system, navigation system

36 S/HTR&FAN F/ R

10 A Seat heaters

37 S/HTR RR 20 A No circuit

Fuse Ampere Circuit

470

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

After a fuse is replaced

If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (P. 471)

If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

When replacing light bulbs

Toyota recommends that you use genuine Toyota products designed for this vehicle. Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable.

CAUTION

To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.

Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.

Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent. Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE

Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

471

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level

of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb

replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.

For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Preparing for light bulb replacement

Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 560)

Front bulb locations

Headlight low beam

(halogen bulb)

Headlight high beam

and daytime running

light

Front side marker light

Front turn signal/park-

ing light

Fog light (if equipped)

472

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Replacing light bulbs

Headlights high beam and daytime running lights

Turn the bulb base counterclock- wise.

Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.

Rear bulb locations

Rear turn signal light

Stop/tail light License plate lights

Back-up light

Rear side marker light

STEP 1

STEP 2

473

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Headlight low beam (halogen bulb)

Turn the bulb base counterclock- wise.

Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.

Fog light (if equipped)

Turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the fog light that you wish to replace.

For example, if you wish to replace the fog light on the left side, turn the steering wheel to the right.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

474

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Remove the fender liner clip.

After turning the clip, pull the clip until it stops.

Turn the clip again, and then pull out the clip.

Partly remove the fender liner and unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.

Turn the bulb base counterclock- wise.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

475

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Front turn signal/parking light

Turn the bulb base counterclock- wise.

Remove the light bulb.

Front side marker light

Turn the bulb base counterclock- wise.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

476

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Remove the light bulb.

Rear side marker light, rear turn signal light and stop/tail light

Open the trunk lid and remove the luggage trim cover clips.

Pull the hook while depressing the button.

Partly remove the luggage trim cover.

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2 The button

STEP 3

477

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Turn the bulb base counterclock- wise.

Rear side marker light

Rear turn signal light

Stop/tail light

Remove the light bulb.

Rear side marker light

Rear turn signal light

Stop/tail light

Back-up light

Open the trunk lid and remove the clips. Then partly remove the trunk panel cover.

Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 1

STEP 2

478

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Turn the bulb base counterclock- wise.

Remove the light bulb.

License plate light

Remove the lens.

Insert a properly sized Allen key into the hole of the lens, and pry off the lens as shown in the illus- tration.

To prevent damaging the vehicle, wrap the tip of the Allen key with a tape.

Remove the light bulb.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

479

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

Lights other than the above

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.

Headlight low beams (discharge bulb)

High mounted stoplight

Discharge headlights (if equipped)

If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored.

LED light bulbs

The high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations:

Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.

Water has built up inside the headlight.

480

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Removing and installing the clips

The luggage trim cover and trunk panel cover clip

The fender liner clip

When replacing light bulbs

P. 470

CAUTION

Replacing light bulbs

Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb. Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

Removing

Installing

Installing

481

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M ainten

ance an d ca

re

CAUTION

Discharge headlights (if equipped)

Contact your Toyota dealer before replacing the discharge headlights (including light bulbs).

Do not touch the discharge headlights high voltage socket when the head- lights are turned on. An extremely high voltage of 30000 V will be discharged and could result in serious injury or death by electric shock.

Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam discharge headlight bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components. Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.

To prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

Vehicles with discharge headlights:

While the low beam headlights are turned on, and for a short time after they have been turned off, metal com- ponents at the rear of the headlight assembly will be extremely hot. To pre- vent burns, do not touch these metal components until you are certain they have cooled down.

Metal

components

482

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

When trouble arises 5

483

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers ......... 484

If your vehicle needs to be towed .................... 485

If you think something is wrong ......................... 489

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ....................... 490

If a warning message is displayed .................... 500

If you have a flat tire......... 519

If the hybrid system will not start .................... 531

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P............ 533

If you lose your keys ........ 534

If the electronic key does not operate properly....... 535

If the vehicles 12-volt battery is discharged...... 538

If your vehicle overheats ....................... 542

If the vehicle becomes stuck .............................. 547

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency ..................... 548

484

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers

NOTICE

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is not operating.

Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is

involved in an accident.

Press the switch to flash all the turn signal lights. To turn them off, press the switch once again.

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

485

5-1. Essential information

If your vehicle needs to be towed

Situations needs to contact dealers before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your hybrid transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer before towing.

A warning message for the hybrid system is shown on the multi- information display and the vehicle does not move.

The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by

your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type

truck or flatbed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro-

vincial and local laws.

If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck from the front, the

vehicle's rear wheels and axles must be in good conditions.

(P. 486, 487)

If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flatbed truck.

486

5-1. Essential information

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

From the front

Release the parking brake.

From the rear

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

487

5-1. Essential information

Using a flatbed truck

If your Toyota is transported by a flatbed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45.

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

When towing the vehicle

Be sure to transport the vehicle with the front wheels raised or with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the front wheels contacting the ground, the drivetrain and related parts may be damaged or electricity generated by the operation of the motor may cause a fire to occur depending on the nature of the damage or malfunction.

488

5-1. Essential information

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

489

5-1. Essential information

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably

needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

Visible symptoms

Fluid leaks under the vehicle (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

The rightmost segment of the engine coolant temperature dis- play flashes

Audible symptoms

Changes in exhaust sound

Excessive tire squeal when cornering

Strange noises related to the suspension system

Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system

Operational symptoms

Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly

Appreciable loss of power

Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

490

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys- tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

*: Brake system warning buzzer:

When there is a possible problem that could affect braking performance, the warning light will come on and a warning buzzer will sound.

Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

P. 503

Warning light Warning light/Details

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Brake system warning light in red (warning buzzer)* Low brake fluid Malfunction in the brake system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally.

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights

comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes

off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.

However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by

your Toyota dealer.

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

491

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi- cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Charging system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the vehicles charging system.

Low engine oil pressure warning light Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.

High engine coolant temperature warning light (the rightmost segment of the engine coolant temperature display flashes)

Indicates that the engine is almost overheating. (P. 542)

Warning light Warning light/Details

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Malfunction indicator lamp Indicates a malfunction in: The hybrid system; The electronic engine control system; or The electronic throttle control system; or The hybrid transmission control system.

SRS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: The SRS airbag system; or The front passenger occupant classification system; or The seat belt pretensioner system.

492

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

ABS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: The ABS; or The brake assist system.

Brake system warning light in yellow Indicates a malfunction in:

The regenerative brake system; or The electronically controlled brake system.

(Comes on)

Slip indicator light Indicates a malfunction in: VSC system; or TRAC system; or Hill-start assist control.

Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS system.

Brake system warning light operation

Although depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may cause the red brake system warning light to turn on and the buzzer to sound, this does not indi- cate a malfunction.

Warning light Warning light/Details

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

493

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light goes off.

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

Open door warning light (warning buzzer)*1

Indicates that a door or the trunk is not fully closed.

Check that all doors and the trunk are closed.

Low fuel level warning light

Indicates remaining fuel is approximately 2.6 gal. (9.7 L, 2.1 Imp. gal.) or less.

Refuel the vehicle.

Drivers/front passen- gers seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2

Warns the driver/front pas- senger to fasten his/her seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

Master warning light A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunc- tion.

P. 500

494

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

*1:Open door warning buzzer:

P. 503 *2:Driver's seat belt buzzer:

The driver's seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the POWER switch is turned to ON mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

Front passenger's seat belt buzzer: The front passenger's seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehi- cle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

(U.S.A. only)

Tire pressure warning light

When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure such as Natural causes (P. 495) Flat tire (P. 519)

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.

The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute: Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system (P. 497)

Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

495

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sen- sors, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), AIR BAG ON indicator light, AIR BAG OFF indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt preten- sioner assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (P. 113)

Front passenger detection sensor, passenger seat belt reminder and warning buzzer

If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passen- ger, and the warning light may not operate properly.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

Is the fuel tank empty? If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

Is the fuel tank cap loose? If it is, tighten it securely.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several driving trips. If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, con- tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by tem- perature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

496

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When a tire is replaced with a spare tire (vehicles with a tire pres- sure warning system)

The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire infla- tion pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few min- utes.

If the tire pressure warning system is not functioning (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following condi- tions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit- ters are used

If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer

If the tire inflation pressure is 51 psi (350 kPa, 3.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher

The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following condi- tions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby

If a radio set at a similar frequency is in use in the vehicle

If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed

If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings

If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)

If tire chains are used

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

497

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the POWER switch is turned to ON mode, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage tempo- rarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.

Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled. (Customizable features P. 576) However, Toyota recommends that the seat belt reminder buzzer be operational to alert the driver and front passen- ger when seat belts are not fastened.

CAUTION

When the electric power steering system warning light comes on

The steering wheel may become extremely heavy. If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and operate using more force than usual.

If the tire pressure warning light comes on (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.

If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres- sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.

Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

498

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

Maintenance of the tires (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys- tem)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a differ- ent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illumi- nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a sub- stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

499

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operat- ing properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indi- cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi- nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi- nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a vari- ety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pres- sure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter- nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

NOTICE

To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

500

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning message is displayed

If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and

perform the following actions:

Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is cur- rently being displayed on the multi-information display.

Multi-information display

If any of the warning lights comes on again after the following actions have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

501

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately.

A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-infor- mation display. The following warning indicates the possibility of dam- age to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Warning message Details

Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system. A buzzer also sounds.

502

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-infor- mation display. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warn- ings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Warning message Details

(Flashes)

Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock sys- tem.

Indicates a malfunction in the smart key sys- tem. A buzzer also sounds.

Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the Blind Spot Moni- tor.

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

503

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures.

A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-infor- mation display. After taking the specified steps to correct the sus- pected problem, check that the warning message goes off.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed.

The system also indi- cates which doors are not fully closed. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5

km/h), flashes

and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the door(s) are not yet fully closed.

Make sure that all the doors are closed.

504

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Indicates that the hood is not fully closed.

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5

km/h), flashes

and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the hood is not yet fully closed.

Close the hood.

Indicates that the trunk is not fully closed.

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5

km/h), flashes

and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk is not yet fully closed.

Close the trunk.

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed (with the POWER switch off and the driver's door opened).

Close the moon roof.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

505

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

(Flashes)

Indicates, if the vehi- cle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), that the parking brake is still engaged.

A buzzer also sounds.

Release the parking brake.

Indicates that the washer fluid level is low.

Add washer fluid.

(If equipped)

Indicates that the Blind Spot Monitor sensors or the sur- rounding area on the bumper is dirty or covered with ice.

Clean the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

506

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

(U.S.A. only)

Indicates that all maintenance accord- ing to the driven dis- tance on the maintenance sched- ule*1 should be per- formed soon.

If necessary, perform maintenance.

Comes on approxi- mately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the maintenance data has been reset.

(U.S.A. only)

Indicates that all maintenance is required to corre- spond to the driven distance on the main- tenance schedule*1. Perform the necessary

maintenance. Please reset the main- tenance data after the maintenance is per- formed.(P. 416)

Comes on approxi- mately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the maintenance data has been reset. (The indicator will not work properly unless the maintenance data has been reset.)

Indicates that the hybrid system has overheated

This message may be displayed when driv- ing under severe oper- ating conditions. (For example, when driv- ing up a long steep hill.)

Stop and check. (P. 542)

Warning message Details Correction procedure

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

507

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

(Flashes)

Indicates that the hybrid battery (trac- tion battery) is low

A buzzer also sounds.

When stopping the vehicle for a long period of time, shift the shift lever to P. The hybrid battery (traction battery) cannot be charged with the shift position in N.

(Flashes)

Indicates that the hybrid battery (trac- tion battery) power has dropped because a long period of time has elapsed after shifting the shift lever to N

A buzzer also sounds.

Restart the hybrid sys- tem when starting the vehicle.

(Flashes)

Indicates that the drivers door was opened with the shift position in any posi- tion other than P

A buzzer also sounds.

Shift the shift lever to P.

(Flashes)

Indicates that the accelerator pedal is depressed while the shift position is in N

A buzzer also sounds.

Release the accelera- tor pedal and shift the shift lever to D, B or R.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

508

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Indicates that the EV drive mode is not available*2

A buzzer also sounds. The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the vehicle is idling, battery charge is low, speed is higher than the EV drive mode operating speed range, acceler- ator pedal is depressed too much) may be displayed.

Use the EV drive mode when it becomes avail- able.

(Flashes 3 times)

Indicates that the EV drive mode has been automatically can- celled*2

A buzzer also sounds. The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the battery charge is low, speed is higher than the EV drive mode speed range, accelerator pedal is depressed too much) may be dis- played.

Drive the vehicle for a while.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

509

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

(Flashes)

Indicates that the POWER switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.

A buzzer also sounds.

Turn the lights off.

*1: Refer to the separate Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

*2: For the EV drive mode operating conditions (P. 165).

Warning message Details Correction procedure

510

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the malfunction repaired immediately.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message and light go off.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer Warning message Details

Correction procedure

Once

(Flashes)

The electronic key is not detected when an attempt is made to start the hybrid sys- tem.

Start the hybrid system with the electronic key present.

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

511

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Once 3 times

(Flashes)

The electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and a door other than the driver's door was opened and closed while the POWER switch was in a mode other than off.

Bring the elec- tronic key back into the vehicle.

The electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and the drivers door was opened and closed while the shift lever in P was selected with- out turning off the POWER switch.

Turn the POWER switch off or bring the elec- tronic key back into the vehicle.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer Warning message Details

Correction procedure

512

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Once Continuous

(Displayed alter- nately)

(Flashes)

An attempt was made to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock the doors without first turning the POWER switch off.

Turn the POWER switch off and lock the doors again.

9 times

(Flashes)

An attempt was made to start the hybrid sys- tem without the electronic key being present, or the elec- tronic key was not functioning normally. An attempt was made to drive when the regu- lar key was not inside the vehi- cle.

Confirm that the electronic key is inside the vehi- cle.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer Warning message Details

Correction procedure

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

513

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Continuous

(Flashes)

The drivers door was opened while any shift lever other than P was selected without turning off the POWER switch.

Change the shift lever to P.

Continuous Continuous

(Displayed alter- nately)

(Flashes)

The electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and the drivers door was opened and closed while any shift lever other than P was selected without turning off the POWER switch.

Change the shift lever to P.

Bring the elec- tronic key back into the vehicle.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer Warning message Details

Correction procedure

514

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Once Continuous

(Flashes)

An attempt was made to lock the doors using the smart key system while the electronic key was still inside the vehi- cle.

Retrieve the electronic key from the vehi- cle and lock the doors again.

Once Continuous

(Flashes)

An attempt was made to lock either front door by opening a door and putting the inside lock button into the lock position, then closing the door by pulling on the outside door handle with the elec- tronic key still inside the vehi- cle.

Retrieve the electronic key from the vehi- cle and lock the doors again.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer Warning message Details

Correction procedure

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

515

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Once

(Flashes)

When the doors were unlocked with the mechanical key and then the POWER switch was pressed, the electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle.

The electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle even after the POWER switch was pressed two consecutive times.

Touch the elec- tronic key to the POWER switch while depressing the brake pedal.

Once

(Flashes)

An attempt was made to start the hybrid sys- tem with the shift lever in N.

Change the shift lever to P and start the hybrid system.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer Warning message Details

Correction procedure

516

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Power was turned off due to the automatic power off func- tion.

Next time when starting the hybrid system, increase the engine speed slightly and maintain that level for approx- imately 5 min- utes to recharge the 12-volt-bat- tery.

Once The electronic key has a low battery.

Replace the electronic key battery. (P. 458)

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer Warning message Details

Correction procedure

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

517

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Once

(Flashes)

The driver's door was opened and closed with the POWER switch turned off and then the POWER switch was put in ACCES- SORY mode twice without the hybrid sys- tem being started.

Press the POWER switch while depressing the brake pedal.

During a hybrid system starting procedure in the event that the electronic key was not func- tioning properly (P. 535), the POWER switch was touched with the electronic key.

Press the POWER switch within 10 seconds of the buzzer sound- ing.

Once

(Flashes)

The steering lock could not be released within 3 sec- onds of the POWER switch being pressed.

Press the POWER switch while depressing the brake pedal and moving the steering wheel left and right.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer Warning message Details

Correction procedure

518

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Once

(Flashes)

The POWER switch has been turned off with the shift lever in a position other than P.

Change the shift lever to P.

Once

(Flashes)

After the POWER switch has been turned off with the shift lever in a position other than P, the shift lever has been shifted to P.

Turn the POWER switch off.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer Warning message Details

Correction procedure

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

519

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a flat tire

Taking out the jack

Lift up the hook of the luggage floor cover on the trunk floor.

Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.

Before jacking up the vehicle

Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.

Set the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Stop the hybrid system.

Turn on the emergency flashers.

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Spare tire

Wheel nut

wrench

Jack

Luggage floor

cover

Jack handle

STEP 1

520

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Secure the luggage floor cover using the hook provided.

Remove the jack.

Taking out the spare tire

Lift up the hook of the luggage floor cover on the trunk floor.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

521

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Secure the luggage floor cover using the hook provided.

Remove the tool tray.

Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.

When taking out or stowing the spare tire, make sure to firmly hold opposite ends of the tire.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

522

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Replacing a flat tire

Chock the tires.

For vehicles with steel wheels, remove the wheel ornament using the wrench.

To protect the wheel ornament, place a rag between the wrench and the wheel ornament, as shown in the illustration.

STEP 1

Flat tire Wheel

chock posi- tions

Front

Left- hand side

Behind the rear right- hand side tire

Right- hand side

Behind the rear left- hand side tire

Rear

Left- hand side

In front of the front right-hand side tire

Right- hand side

In front of the front left-hand side tire

STEP 2

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

523

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).

Turn the tire jack portion A by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate the jack point positions.

Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

524

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

Installing the spare tire

Remove any dirt or foreign mat- ter from the wheel contact sur- face.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.

Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

When replacing a steel wheel with a steel wheel, tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered por- tion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

STEP 6

STEP 1

STEP 2

Disc wheel

seat

Tapered portion

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

525

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When replacing an aluminum wheel with a steel wheel, tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

Lower the vehicle.

Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque: 76 ftlbf (103 Nm, 10.5 kgfm)

Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

Tapered portion

Disc wheel

seat

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

526

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

The compact spare tire

The compact spare tire is identified by the label TEMPORARY USE ONLY on the tire sidewall. Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.

Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire. (P. 558)

When using the compact spare tire

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice

Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:

Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.

Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehicle.

Fit tire chains to the front tires.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

527

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

When using the compact spare tire

Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.

Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously.

Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.

Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cor- nering.

When storing the compact spare tire

Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the compact spare tire and the body of the vehicle.

When the compact spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following sys- tems may not operate correctly:

ABS & Brake assist

Cruise control

VSC

TRAC

EPS

Navigation system (if equipped)

Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or seri- ous injury.

528

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury.

Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.

Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire. Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.

Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.

Do not start or run the hybrid system while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.

When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle may be injured.

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

529

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

Replacing a flat tire

Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immedi- ately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ftlbf (103 Nm, 10.5 kgfm) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving.

When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifi- cally designed for that wheel.

If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward. (P. 454)

530

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.

Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair.

Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle.

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

When replacing the tires (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys- tem)

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit- ters (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 444)

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

531

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the hybrid system will not start

Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the

situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate proce-

dure:

The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting procedure is being followed. (P. 157)

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (P. 536)

There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicles tank. Refuel the vehicle.

There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (P. 106)

There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.

The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available to start the hybrid system. (P. 532)

The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 538)

The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or cor- roded.

532

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Emergency start function

When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the POWER switch is functioning normally:

Set the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Turn the POWER switch to ACCESSORY mode.

Press and hold the POWER switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be discon- nected.

The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 538)

Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

533

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal,

there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to pre-

vent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle

inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to

ensure that the shift lever can be shifted:

Set the parking brake.

Turn the POWER switch to ACCESSORY mode.

Depress the brake pedal.

Pry the cover up with a flat- head screwdriver or equiva- lent.

Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

534

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you lose your keys

New genuine Toyota keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using

the other key and the key number stamped on your key number

plate.

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

535

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the electronic key does not operate properly

Locking and unlocking the doors and key linked functions

Use the mechanical key (P. 48) in order to perform the following operations (drivers door only):

Locks all doors

Closes the windows and moon roof (turn and hold)*

Unlocks all doors

Turning the key rearward unlocks the drivers door. Turning the key once again unlocks the other doors.

Opens the windows and moon roof (turn and hold)*

*: This setting must be custom- ized at your Toyota dealer.

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is inter-

rupted (P. 58) or the electronic key cannot be used because the

battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote con-

trol cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be

opened and the hybrid system can be started by following the proce-

dure below.

536

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Starting the hybrid system

Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.

Touch the Toyota emblem side of the electronic key to the POWER switch.

When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the POWER switch will turn to ON mode.

When the smart key system is deactivated in customization set- ting, the POWER switch will turn to ACCESSORY mode.

Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that is dis-

played on the multi-information display.

Press the POWER switch.

In the event that the POWER switch still cannot be operated, con- tact your Toyota dealer.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

537

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stopping the hybrid system

Shift the shift lever to P and press the POWER switch as you normally do when stopping the hybrid system.

Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (P. 458)

Changing POWER switch modes

Release the brake pedal and press the POWER switch in above. The hybrid system does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 159)

If the doors cannot be locked or unlocked by the smart key system

Lock and unlock the doors by the mechanical key or wireless remote control.

When the electronic key does not work properly

Make sure that the smart key system has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on. (Customizable features P. 576)

Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (P. 57)

STEP 3

538

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicles 12-volt battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if

the vehicle's 12-volt battery is discharged.

You can also call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi- cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by follow- ing the steps below.

Open the trunk lid and remove the 12-volt battery cover. (P. 439)

Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:

Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the exclusive jump starting terminal on your vehicle

Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery termi- nal on the second vehicle

Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration.

STEP 1

STEP 2

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

539

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged

The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off.

Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run- ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

When the 12-volt battery is removed or discharged

The hybrid system may not start. (P. 440)

Make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery. The key may be locked in the vehicle if the alarm is activated. (P. 109)

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the gaso- line engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle.

Open and close any of the doors with the POWER switch OFF.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the POWER switch to ON mode, then start the hybrid sys- tem.

Make sure the READY indicator comes on. If the indicator does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.

Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were con- nected.

Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7

540

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Charging the 12-volt battery

The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges automatically while the hybrid system is oper- ating.)

Precautions when the 12-volt battery is discharged

In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart key system when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote con- trol or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.

The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt bat- tery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.

The POWER switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12- volt battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12- volt battery, turn the POWER switch off. If you are unsure what mode the POWER switch was in before the 12- volt battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12- volt battery.

CAUTION

Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam- mable gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery:

Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.

Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other.

Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12-volt battery.

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

541

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

12-volt battery precautions

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery:

When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.

In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.

Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.

Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.

After recharging the 12-volt battery

Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possi- ble. If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers.

When replacing the 12-volt battery

P. 442

542

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats

Correction procedures

If the rightmost segment of the engine coolant temperature display are flashing

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condition- ing system, and then stop the hybrid system.

If you see steam: Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.

If you do not see steam: Carefully lift the hood.

After the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

Radiator

Cooling fans

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.

The rightmost segment of the engine coolant temperature dis- play (P. 174) is flashing or a loss of hybrid system power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)

HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT (P. 503) is shown on the multi-information display.

Steam comes out from under the hood.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

543

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the F and L lines on the reservoir.

Reservoir

F (Full)

L (Low)

Radiator cap

Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emer- gency if coolant is unavailable.

Start the hybrid system and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.

The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

544

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the fans are not operating: Stop the hybrid system immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.

If the fans are operating: Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.

If HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT is shown on the multi-infor- mation display

Stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Stop the hybrid system and carefully lift the hood.

After the hybrid system has cooled down, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

Radiator

Cooling fans

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

STEP 7

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

545

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the FULL and LOW lines on the reservoir.

Reservoir

FULL

LOW

Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emer- gency if coolant is unavailable.

Start the hybrid system and check for the multi-information display.

If the message does not disappear: Stop the hybrid system and contact your Toyota dealer.

If the message is not displayed: Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

546

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus- ing serious injuries such as burns.

After the hybrid system has been turned off, check that on the

multi-information display and the READY indicator are off. When the hybrid system is operating, the gasoline engine may automatically start, or the cooling fans may suddenly operate even if the gasoline engine stops. Do not touch or approach rotating parts such as the fans, which may lead to fingers or clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) getting caught, resulting in serious injury.

Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the hybrid system and radia- tor are hot. Serious injuries, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure.

NOTICE

When adding engine/power control unit coolant

Wait until the hybrid system has cooled down before adding engine/power control unit coolant. When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid sys- tem too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.

To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:

Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.)

Do not use any coolant additive.

5

W he

n trou ble

a rises

547

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck

CAUTION

When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur- rounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

To avoid damage to the transmission and other components

Avoid spinning the wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary.

If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle

becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

Stop the hybrid system. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.

Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire.

Place wood, stones or some other material under the tires to help provide traction.

Restart the hybrid system.

Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.

Turn off TRAC if this function is hampering your attempts to free the vehicle. (P. 208)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

548

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

CAUTION

If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving

Power assist for the steering wheel will be lost, making the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the hybrid system.

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the

vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following pro-

cedure:

Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.

If the shift lever is shifted to N

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

Stop the hybrid system.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.

To stop the hybrid system, press and hold the POWER switch for 2 consecutive sec- onds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in suc- cession.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 3

Press and hold for 2 seconds or more, or press briefly 3 times or more

STEP 4

STEP 5

Vehicle specifications 6

549

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) ......... 550

Fuel information ............... 561

Tire information ................ 564

6-2. Customization

Customizable features ..... 576

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize .............. 582

550

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weights

*1: Unladen vehicles *2: P215/55R17 tires *3: P205/65R16 tires

Vehicle identification

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is located on the top left of the instrument panel.

Overall length 189.2 in. (4805 mm)

Overall width 71.7 in. (1820 mm)

Overall height*1 57.9 in. (1470 mm)

Wheelbase 109.3 in. (2775 mm)

Tread

Front 62.0 in. (1575 mm)*2

62.4 in. (1585 mm)*3

Rear 61.6 in. (1565 mm)*2

62.0 in. (1575 mm)*3

Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage)

905 lb. (410 kg)

551

6-1. Specifications

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

This number is also on the Certi- fication Label.

Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

552

6-1. Specifications

Engine

Fuel

Electric motor (Traction motor)

Hybrid battery (Traction battery)

Model 2AR-FXE

Type 4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke 3.54 3.86 in. (90.0 98.0 mm)

Displacement 152.2 cu.in. (2494 cm3)

Valve clearance (engine cold)

Automatic adjustment

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only

Octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher

Fuel tank capacity (Reference)

17.0 gal. (64.35 L, 14.2 Imp. gal.)

Type Permanent magnet synchronous motor

Maximum output 105 kW

Maximum torque 199 ftlbf (270 Nm, 27.5 kgfm)

Type Nickel-metal hydride battery

Voltage 7.2 V/module

Capacity 6.5 Ah (3HR)

Quantity 34 modules

Overall voltage 244.8 V

553

6-1. Specifications

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

Lubrication system

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

Engine oil selection

Toyota Genuine Motor Oil is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20

SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather. If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE 5W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change.

Oil capacity (Drain and refill refer- ence*)

With filter Without filter

4.6 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp. qt.) 4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp. qt.)

Outside temperature

554

6-1. Specifications

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):

The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows

cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier

starting of the engine in cold weather.

The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when

the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a

higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high

speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container label:

The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

555

6-1. Specifications

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

Cooling system

Ignition system

Capacity (Reference) Gasoline engine Power control unit

7.6 qt. (7.2 L, 6.3 Imp. qt.) 3.4 qt. (3.2 L, 2.8 Imp. qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following: Toyota Super Long Life Coolant A similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-sili-

cate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

Spark plug

Make

Gap

DENSO FK16HR-A8

0.031 in. (0.8 mm)

NOTICE

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

556

6-1. Specifications

Electrical system

Transmission

*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, con- tact your Toyota dealer.

Battery

Open voltage* at 68F (20C):

12.6 12.8 V Fully charged 12.2 12.4 V Half charged 11.8 12.0 V Discharged (*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the engine and all the lights are turned off)

Charging rates 5 A max.

Fluid capacity* 3.9 qt. (3.7 L, 3.3 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

NOTICE

Transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than Toyota Genuine ATF WS may ulti- mately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

557

6-1. Specifications

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

Brakes

*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N, 51 kgf) while the hybrid system is operating

*2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67 lbf (300 N, 31 kgf).

Pedal clearance*1 3.62 in. (92 mm)

Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1 6 mm)

Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake pedal travel*2 7 10 clicks

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

558

6-1. Specifications

Steering

Tires and wheels

16-inch tires

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Tire size P205/65R16 94S, T155/70D17 110M

Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Driving under normal conditions Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160 km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 3 psi (20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Wheel size 16 6 1/2 JJ, 17 4 T (compact spare)

Wheel nut torque 76 ftlbf (103 Nm, 10.5 kgfm)

559

6-1. Specifications

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

17-inch tires

Tire size P215/55R17 93V, T155/70D17 110M

Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Driving under normal conditions Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160 km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 3 psi (20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Wheel size 17 7 J, 17 4 T (compact spare)

Wheel nut torque 76 ftlbf (103 Nm, 10.5 kgfm)

560

6-1. Specifications

Light bulbs

*: If equipped A: H11 halogen bulbs B: HB3 halogen bulbs C: D4S discharge bulbs D: Wedge base bulbs (clear) E: Wedge base bulbs (amber) F: Double end bulbs

Light bulbs Bulb No. W Type

Exterior

Headlights Low beam (halogen bulbs)* Low beam (discharge bulbs)* High beam

9005

55

35

60

A

C

B

Front side marker lights

5 D

Rear side marker lights

5 D

Front turn signal/park- ing lights

28/8 E

Rear turn signal lights 21 E

Stop/tail lights 21/5 D

License plate lights 5 D

Back-up lights 921 16 D

Fog lights* 55 A

Interior

Interior/front personal lights

5 D

Interior/rear personal lights*

8 D

Rear interior light* 8 F

Door courtesy lights 168 5 D

Vanity lights* 8 D

Trunk light 194 3.8 D

561

6-1. Specifications

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

Fuel information

Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gas- oline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.

Gasoline quality standards

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have devel- oped a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide.

The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emis- sion levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.

The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.

You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.

Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use

of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result

in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

562

6-1. Specifications

Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.

All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPAs lowest additives con- centration program.

Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.

Recommendation of the use of cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxy- genates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline

If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

Use only gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol. DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 15% etha- nol, including from any pump labeled E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).

DO NOT use gasoline

containing more than 15%

ethanol.

(30% ethanol)

(50% ethanol)

(85% ethanol)

563

6-1. Specifications

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methyl- cyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

If your engine knocks

Consult your Toyota dealer.

You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler- ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

NOTICE

Notice on fuel quality

Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.

Do not use leaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicles three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking. At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

Fuel-related poor driveability

If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.

564

6-1. Specifications

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

Full-size tire

Compact spare tire

Tire size (P. 567)

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 566)

Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading that follows.

Location of treadwear indicators (P. 443)

565

6-1. Specifications

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

Tire ply composition and materials

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a bias-ply tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube main- tains the air pressure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 445)

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 558)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Summer tires or all season tires (P. 446)

An all season tire has M+S on the sidewall. A tire not marked M+S is a summer tire.

TEMPORARY USE ONLY (P. 526)

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase TEMPORARY USE ONLY molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

566

6-1. Specifications

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT symbol* Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire manufacturer's identifica- tion mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

567

6-1. Specifications

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

Tire size

Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical tire size.

Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use)

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio (tire height to section width)

Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Wheel diameter (inches)

Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)

Tire dimensions

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

568

6-1. Specifications

Tire section names

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

569

6-1. Specifications

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci- fied government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turn- ing) traction.

Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, represent- ing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci- fied indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo- ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

570

6-1. Specifications

Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa- rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire fail- ure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term Meaning

Cold tire inflation pres- sure

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended infla- tion pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those stan- dard items which may be replaced) of auto- matic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehi- cle weight

The sum of: (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight

571

6-1. Specifications

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

Tire related term Meaning

Normal occupant weight

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows

Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci- fied in the third column of Table 1* below

Production options weight

The combined weight of installed regular pro- duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation Rim diameter and width

Rim type designation The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

Vehicle normal load on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occu- pant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two

572

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term Meaning

Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the cen- terline of the tread

Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com- pounds

Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner- liner of the tire extending to cord material

CT

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corre- sponding standard tire

Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

573

6-1. Specifications

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

Tire related term Meaning

Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

Intended outboard sidewall

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufac- turer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asym- metrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as prima- rily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum per- missible inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Overall width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including eleva- tions due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, mul- tipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.

574

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term Meaning

Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adja- cent plies

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi- cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro- vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

Radial ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corre- sponding standard tire

Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding ele- vations due to labeling, decoration, or protec- tive bands

Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E- 1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which

is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall

Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

575

6-1. Specifications

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

*: Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Tire related term Meaning

Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

Designated seating capacity, Number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehi-

cle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second

seat

11 through 15 5 2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1

in fourth seat

16 through 20 7 2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1

in fourth seat

576

6-2. Customization

Customizable features

Customizable Features

Changing by using the Entune Audio system*1:

Press the SETUP button.

Press the Vehicle button on the Setup screen.

Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for details.

Changing by using the Entune Audio Plus system*2 or Entune Pre- mium Audio with Navigation system*2:

Press the APPS button.

Select Setup on the Apps screen and select Vehicle.

Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for details.

Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer

Definition of symbols: O = Available, = Not available

*1: Audio system with CAR button

*2: Audio system with APPS button

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-

sonalized to suit your preferences. The settings of these features

can be changed on the audio system screen or at your Toyota dealer.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

577

6-2. Customization

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

Item Function Default set-

ting Customized

setting

Smart key system and wireless remote control (P. 51, 64)

Operation sig- nal (Emergency flashers)

On Off O O

Operation sig- nal (Buzzer)

On Off O

Operation buzzer volume

Level 5 Off to level 7 O O O

Time elapsed before auto- matic door lock function is acti- vated if door is not opened after being unlocked

60 seconds

Off

O O30 seconds

120 seconds

Open door warning buzzer

On Off O

Smart key system (P. 51)

Smart key sys- tem

On Off O

Number of per- missible times of continuous smart lock

Twice Unlimited O

578

6-2. Customization

Wireless remote control (P. 64)

Wireless remote control

On Off O

Unlocking operation

Driver's door unlocked in one step, all

doors unlocked in two steps

All doors unlocked in one step.

O O O

Panic function On Off O

Trunk unlock- ing operation

Press and hold (short)

Off

O

Press twice

One short press

Press and hold (long)

Item Function Default set-

ting Customized

setting

579

6-2. Customization

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

Door lock (P. 67)

Unlocking using a key

Driver's door unlocked in one step, all

doors unlocked in two steps

All doors unlocked in one step.

O O

Speed-detect- ing automatic door lock func- tion

Off On O O O

Opening driver's door unlocks all doors

Off On O O

Shifting gears to P unlocks all doors.

On Off O O O

Shifting gears to position other than P locks all doors.

On Off O O O

Automatic light con- trol system (P. 192)

Light sensor sensitivity

Level 3 Level 1 to 5 O O O

Time elapsed before head- lights automati- cally turn off after doors are closed

30 seconds

Off

O O O60 seconds

90 seconds

Lights (P. 192)

Daytime run- ning light sys- tem (except Canada)

On Off O O O

Item Function Default set-

ting Customized

setting

580

6-2. Customization

Illumination (P. 364)

Time elapsed before lights turn off

15 seconds

Off

O O O7.5 seconds

30 seconds

Operation when the doors are unlocked

On Off O

Operation after the POWER switch turned OFF

On Off O

Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person

On Off O

Seat belt reminder (P. 493)

Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer

On Off O

Automatic air condi- tioning sys- tem (P. 238)

A/C auto switch operation

Auto Manual O O

Air condition- ing control of Eco drive mode

On Off O

Item Function Default set-

ting Customized

setting

581

6-2. Customization

6

V ehicle sp

ecification s

*: If equipped

Power win- dow (drivers door) & moon roof* (P. 95, 98)

Key linked opening

Off On O

Wireless remote control linked opening

Off On O

Key linked clos- ing

Off On O

Wireless remote control linked opening buzzer

On Off O

Moon roof*

(P. 98)

Linked opera- tion of compo- nents when door key is used

Slide only Tilt only O

Linked opera- tion of compo- nents when wireless remote control is used

Slide only Tilt only O

Item Function Default set-

ting Customized

setting

582

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize

Item When to initialize Reference

Maintenance data After the maintenance is performed P. 416

The following item must be initialized for normal system operation

after such cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or mainte-

nance being performed on the vehicle:

For owners 7

583

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners .............. 584

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ..................... 585

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ..................... 587

584

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can- not become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

585

7

F or ow

ners

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions

extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.

Utilisation correcte des ceintures de scurit

Tendez la sangle diagonale de sorte qu'elle couvre compltement l'paule, sans entrer en contact avec le cou ou glisser de l'paule.

Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches.

Rglez la position du dossier de sige. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus droit possible et calez- vous bien dans le sige.

Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de scurit.

586

Entretien et soin

Ceintures de scurit

Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une ponge humecte d'eau savonneuse tide. Profitez de l'occasion pour vrifier rgulirement que les ceintures ne sont pas effiloches, entailles, ou ne paraissent pas exagrment uses.

Ceinture de scurit arrire

ATTENTION

Dtrioration et usure des ceintures de scurit

Inspectez les ceintures de scurit priodiquement. Contrlez qu'elles ne sont pas entailles, effiloches, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrs. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de scurit dfectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplace. Une ceinture de scurit dfectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.

Si la ceinture de scurit est sortie de son guide, repassez-la dedans avant de l'utiliser.

587

7

F or ow

ners

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions

extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.

See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instruc-

tions in English.

Coussins gonflables SRS frontaux

Coussin gonflable SRS conducteur/coussin gonflable du passager avant Participent la protection de la tte et du thorax du conducteur et du passager avant contre les chocs avec les lments intrieurs

Coussins gonflables SRS de genoux Participent la protection du conducteur et du passager avant

588

Coussins gonflables SRS latraux et rideaux

Coussins gonflables SRS latraux avant Participent la protection du haut du corps des occupants assis sur le sige avant

Coussins gonflables SRS latraux arrire Participent la protection du haut du corps des occupants assis aux places arrire extrieures

Coussins gonflables SRS rideaux Participent principalement la protection de la tte des occupants assis aux places extrieures

589

7

F or ow

ners

Composition du systme de coussins gonflables SRS

Capteurs d'impact avant

Systme de classification de l'occupant du sige passager avant (ECU et capteurs)

Coussin gonflable de genoux

Capteurs d'impact latral (porte avant)

Capteurs d'impact latral (avant)

Coussin gonflable du passager avant

Coussins gonflables latraux avant

Coussins gonflables rideaux

Coussins gonflables latraux arrire

Tmoins indicateurs AIR BAG ON et AIR BAG OFF

Tmoin d'avertissement SRS

Commutateur de boucle de ceinture de scurit du sige du passager avant

Montage du capteur de coussin gonflable

Capteurs d'impact latral (arrire)

Coussin gonflable conducteur

Commutateur de boucle de ceinture de scurit du conducteur

Prtensionneurs de ceintures de scurit et limiteurs de force

590

Votre vhicule est quip de COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELLIGENTS, conus selon les normes de scurit amricaines applicables aux vhicules moteur (FMVSS208). Le botier lectronique (ECU) des coussins gonflables rgule le dploiement de ces derniers sur la base des informations qu'il reoit des capteurs, etc., indiqus ci-dessus dans le schma illustrant les composants du systme. Parmi ces informations figurent la gravit du choc et l'occupation du vhicule par les passagers. Le dploiement rapide des coussins gonflables est obtenu au moyen d'une raction chimique dans les dispositifs de gonflage, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant damortir le mouvement des occupants.

591

7

F or ow

ners

ATTENTION

Prcautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS

Respectez les prcautions suivantes avec les coussins gonflables SRS. Autrement, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre.

Le conducteur et les passagers du vhicule doivent porter correctement leur ceinture de scurit. Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplmentaires utiliser avec les ceintures de scurit.

Le coussin gonflable SRS conducteur se dploie avec une violence considrable, qui peut tre trs dangereux, voire mortel, si le conducteur se trouve trs prs du coussin gonflable. L'autorit fdrale charge de la scurit routire aux tats-Unis, la NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) conseille:

Sachant que la zone de danger pour le coussin gonflable conducteur se trouve dans les premiers 2 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) de dploiement, vous placer 10 in. (250 mm) de votre coussin gonflable conducteur vous garantit une marge de scurit suffisante. Cette distance est mesurer entre l'axe du volant et le sternum. Si vous tes assis moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs faons:

Reculez votre sige le plus possible, de manire pouvoir encore atteindre confortablement les pdales.

Inclinez lgrement le dossier du sige. Bien que les vhicules puissent tre diffrents les uns des autres, la plupart des conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), mme avec le sige conducteur compltement avanc, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de sige. Si vous avez des difficults voir la route aprs avoir inclin votre sige, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidrapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre vhicule est quip du rglage en hauteur du sige, remontez-le.

Si votre volant est rglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour effet d'orienter le coussin gonflable en direction de votre poitrine plutt que de votre tte et de votre cou.

Rglez votre sige selon ces recommandations de la NHTSA, tout en conservant le contrle des pdales, du volant et la vue des commandes du tableau de bord.

592

ATTENTION

Prcautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS

Le coussin gonflable SRS passager avant se dploie galement avec une violence considrable, qui peut tre trs dangereuse, voire mortelle, si le passager avant se trouve trs prs du coussin gonflable. loignez le sige du passager avant au maximum du coussin gonflable et rglez le dossier de sige de faon tre assis bien droit dans le sige.

Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou protgs peuvent tre grivement blesss ou tus par le dploiement d'un coussin gonflable. Installez dans un sige de scurit enfant les enfants trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de scurit. Toyota recommande vivement que les nourrissons et les jeunes enfants soient installs sur le sige arrire du vhicule et convenablement attachs. Les siges arrire sont plus srs pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le sige du passager avant.

Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture de scurit aux boucles de ceinture de scurit avant, mais pas au pne de la ceinture de scurit, les coussins gonflables SRS frontaux dtectent que le conducteur et le passager avant ont attach leur ceinture de scurit, alors mme que ce n'est pas le cas. Dans ce cas, il se peut que les coussins gonflables SRS frontaux ne se dploient pas correctement en cas d'accident et vous risquez d'tre tu ou grivement bless. Veillez porter la ceinture de scurit avec la rallonge de ceinture de scurit.

593

7

F or ow

ners

ATTENTION

Prcautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS

Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du sige et ne vous appuyez pas contre le tableau de bord.

Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout devant le coussin gonflable SRS passager avant ou bien s'asseoir sur les genoux du passager avant.

Ne laissez pas les occupants des siges avant voyager avec un objet sur les genoux.

Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte, contre le rail latral de toit ou contre les montants avant, latraux et arrire.

594

ATTENTION

Prcautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS

Interdisez quiconque de s'agenouiller sur les siges passagers en appui contre la porte ou de sortir la tte ou les mains l'extrieur du vhicule.

Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur le tableau de bord, la garniture du volant de direction et la partie infrieure du tableau de bord. Au dploiement des coussins gonflables SRS conducteur, passager avant et genoux, tout objet risque de se transformer en projectile.

Ne rien fixer aux portes, la vitre de pare-brise, aux vitres latrales, aux montants avant et arrire, au rail latral de toit et la poigne de maintien.

595

7

F or ow

ners

ATTENTION

Prcautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS

Ne suspendez aucun cintre nu ni objet dur aux crochets vtements. En cas de dploiement des coussins gonflables SRS rideaux, tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et causer des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

Si un cache en vinyle recouvre la partie o le coussin gonflable SRS de genoux se dploie, veillez l'enlever.

N'utilisez aucun accessoire de sige venant recouvrir les zones de dploiement des coussins gonflables SRS latraux, car il risquerait d'en gner le dploiement. De tels accessoires peuvent empcher les coussins gonflables latraux de fonctionner correctement, dsactiver le dispositif ou entraner le dploiement accidentel des coussins gonflables latraux, ce qui pourrait entraner la mort ou des blessures graves.

vitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones renfermant les composants des coussins gonflables SRS. En effet, cela pourrait entraner un fonctionnement anormal des coussins gonflables SRS.

Ne touchez aucun composant du systme immdiatement aprs le dploiement (gonflage) des coussins gonflables SRS, car ils peuvent tre chauds.

596

ATTENTION

Prcautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS

Si vous avez des difficults respirer aprs le dploiement des coussins gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou bien descendez du vhicule si cela ne prsente pas de danger. Essuyez tout rsidu ds que possible afin d'viter d'ventuelles irritations de la peau.

Si les parties renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, telles que la garniture du volant et les garnitures de montants avant et arrire, sont abmes ou craqueles, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Toyota.

Modification et mise au rebut des lments du systme de coussins

gonflables SRS

Consultez imprativement votre concessionnaire Toyota si vous avez besoin d'intervenir sur votre vhicule ou de procder l'une des modifications suivantes. Les coussins gonflables SRS risquent de ne pas fonctionner correctement ou de se dployer (se gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant ainsi des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

Installation, dpose, dmontage et rparation des coussins gonflables SRS

Rparations, modifications, dmontage ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des siges ou de leur garnissage, des montants avant, latraux et arrire ou des rails latraux de toit

Rparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du bouclier avant, ou des flancs de l'habitacle

Installation de chasse-neige, de treuils, etc., sur la calandre (pare-buffle ou pare-kangourou, etc.)

Modification des suspensions du vhicule

Installation d'appareils lectroniques, tels qu'un radiometteur/rcepteur ou d'un lecteur CD

Amnagements du vhicule visant permettre sa conduite par une personne atteinte d'un handicap physique

Index

597

Abbreviation list ..................... 598

Alphabetical index.................. 599

What to do if............................ 611

598

Abbreviation list

Abbreviation/Acronym list

ABBREVIATIONS MEANING

A/C Air Conditioning

ABS Anti-lock Brake System

ACC Accessory

ALR Automatic Locking Retractor

BSM Blind Spot Monitor

CRS Child Restraint System

DISP Display

ECU Electronic Control Unit

EDR Event Data Recorder

ELR Emergency Locking Retractor

EPS Electric Power Steering

GAWR Gross Axle Weight Ratings

GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

I/M Emission inspection and maintenance

LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

LED Light Emitting Diode

M + S Mud and Snow

MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl

MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether

OBD On Board Diagnostics

SRS Supplemental Restraint System

TIN Tire Identification Number

TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System

TRAC Traction Control

VIN Vehicle Identification Number

VSC Vehicle Stability Control

599

Alphabetical index

Alphabetical index

AAC .......................................... 274 A/C............................................ 238 ABS........................................... 207 ACCESSORY mode................. 157 Air conditioning filter.............. 456 Air conditioning system

Air conditioning filter ............. 456 Automatic air conditioning

system................................ 238 Airbags

Airbag operating conditions........................... 116

Airbag precautions for your child.................................... 120

Airbag warning light.............. 491 Curtain shield airbag

operating conditions........... 117 Curtain shield airbag

precautions ........................ 120 Front passenger occupant

classification system .......... 125 General airbag

precautions ........................ 120 Locations of airbags ............. 113 Modification and disposal of

airbags ............................... 124 Proper driving

posture ....................... 111, 120 Side airbag operating

conditions........................... 117 Side airbag precautions........ 120 SRS airbags ......................... 113

Alarm........................................ 108 Antenna.................................... 273 Anti-lock brake system........... 207 Armrest .................................... 385 Ashtray..................................... 380 Assist grips.............................. 386 Audio input .............................. 256

Audio system Antenna.................................273 Audio input ............................256 CD player ..............................274 iPod.......................................281 MP3/WMA/AAC disc .............274 Optimal use ...........................271 Portable music

player ..................................256 Radio.....................................272 Steering wheel audio

switch..................................254 USB memory.........................287 USB/AUX port .......................256

Automatic air conditioning system ....................................238

Automatic light control system ....................................192

AUX port ...................................256 Auxiliary boxes ........................374

Back-up lights Replacing light bulbs .............471 Wattage.................................560

Battery Checking ...............................439 Hybrid battery

(traction battery)....................35 If the vehicle has a discharged

12-volt battery .....................538 Preparing and checking

before winter .......................229 Blind Spot Monitor...................214 Bottle holders...........................371 Brake

Fluid ......................................436 Parking brake ........................172

Brake assist..............................207 Break-in tips .............................147 BSM...........................................214

A

B

600

Alphabetical index

Care Exterior..................................410 Interior ...................................413 Seat belts ..............................414

Cargo capacity .........................224 CD player ..................................274 Chains.......................................229 Child restraint system

Booster seats, definition........131 Booster seats, installation .....135 Convertible seats,

definition .............................131 Convertible seats,

installation...........................135 Front passenger occupant

classification system...........125 Infant seats, definition ...........131 Infant seats, installation.........135 Installing CRS with LATCH

anchors ...............................136 Installing CRS with

seat belts ............................138 Installing CRS with top tether

straps..................................141

Child safety Airbag precautions ................120 Child restraint system ...........131 Child-protectors.......................68 How your child should wear

the seat belt ..........................86 Installing child restraints........135 Moon roof precautions ..........101 Power window lock switch ......95 Power window precautions .....97 Removed key battery

precautions .........................459 Seat belt extender

precautions ...........................89 Seat belt precautions ..............87 Seat heater precautions........384 Trunk precautions ...................74 12-volt battery

precautions .................441, 541 Child-protectors.........................68 Cleaning

Exterior..................................410 Interior...................................413 Seat belts ..............................414

Clock.........................................378 Coat hooks ...............................387 Coin holder...............................370 Compass...................................398 Condenser ................................436 Console box .............................369 Cooling system

Hybrid system overheating ...542 Cruise control ..........................204 Cup holder................................372 Curtain shield airbags.............113 Customizable features ............576

C

601

Alphabetical index

Daytime running light system ................................... 195

Defogger Outside rear view mirror ....... 248 Rear window......................... 248

Dimensions.............................. 550 Dinghy towing ......................... 234 Display

Energy flow............................. 41 Multi-information display....... 185 Trip information .................... 185 Warning message ................ 500

Do-it-yourself maintenance.......................... 423

Door courtesy light Door courtesy light ............... 364 Wattage................................ 560

Doors Door lock .................... 51, 64, 67 Door windows......................... 95 Side mirrors ............................ 93

Driver's seat belt reminder light ........................................ 493

Driving Break-in tips ......................... 147 Correct posture..................... 111 Procedures ........................... 146 Winter driving tips................. 229

Electric power steering ...........209 Electronic key

If the electronic key does not operate properly............535

Emergency flashers Switch....................................484

Emergency, in case of If a warning light turns on ......490 If a warning message is

displayed.............................500 If the electronic key does not

operate properly..................535 If the Hybrid system will not

start.....................................531 If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P......................533 If the vehicle has a discharged

12-volt battery .....................538 If the warning buzzer

sounds ................................490 If you have a flat tire .............519 If you lose your keys .............534 If you think something is

wrong..................................489 If your vehicle becomes

stuck ...................................547 If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency ...548 If your vehicle needs to be

towed ..................................485 If your vehicle overheats .......542

D E

602

Alphabetical index

Engine Accessory mode....................157 Compartment ........................429 Hood......................................426 How to start the

hybrid system......................157 Identification number.............550 If the hybrid system will

not start...............................531 Ignition switch........................157 Overheating...........................542 POWER switch ...................157

Engine coolant Capacity ................................555 Checking ...............................434 Preparing and checking

before winter .......................229 Engine coolant temperature

display ....................................174 Engine oil

Capacity ................................553 Checking ...............................430 Preparing and checking

before winter .......................229 Engine/power control unit

coolant Capacity ................................555 Checking ...............................434 Preparing and checking

before winter .......................229 EPS............................................207 EV drive mode..........................165 Event data recorder ...................23

Floor mat ..................................388 Fluid

Brake.....................................436 Washer..................................438

Fog lights Replacing light bulbs.............471 Switch ...................................198 Wattage.................................560

Front fog lights Switch ...................................198 Wattage.................................560

Front passenger occupant classification system ............125

Front passenger's seat belt reminder light ........................493

Front seats Adjustment ..............................76

Front side marker lights Replacing light bulbs.............471 Wattage.................................560

Front turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs.............471 Wattage.................................560

Fuel Capacity ................................552 Fuel gauge ............................174 Gas station information .........612 Information ............................561 Refueling...............................102 Type ......................................552

Fuel door ..................................102 Fuel filler door..........................102 Fuses ........................................460

F

603

Alphabetical index

Garage door opener................ 391 Gas station information.......... 612 Gauges..................................... 174 Glove box................................. 368 Grocery bag hooks ................. 390

Hazard lights Switch................................... 484

Head restraints Adjusting ................................ 81

Headlights Replacing light bulbs ............ 471 Switch................................... 192 Wattage................................ 560

Heaters Outside rear view mirror ....... 248 Seat heater........................... 383

Hill-start assist control ........... 207 Hood......................................... 426 Hooks

Grocery bag hooks............... 390 Horn.......................................... 173 Hybrid system

Emergency shut off system.... 36 Energy monitor/consumption

screen .................................. 41 High voltage components....... 35 Hybrid system indicator ........ 180 POWER switch .................. 157 Vehicle Proximity

Notification System .............. 31

I/M test.......................................422 Identification number

Electric motor ........................551 Engine ...................................551 Vehicle ..................................551

Ignition switch..........................157 Illuminated entry system.........366 Immobilizer system..................106 Indicator lights .........................180 Initialization

Items to initialize....................582 Inside rear view mirror ..............91 Interior lights

Interior lights..........................364 Switch....................................365 Wattage.................................560

Jack Positioning a floor jack ..........427 Vehicle-equipped jack ...........519

Jack handle ..............................519

Keyless entry..............................64 Keys

Electronic key..........................48 If the electronic key does

not operate properly............535 If you lose your keys .............534 Ignition switch........................157 Key number.............................48 Keyless entry...........................64 Keys ........................................48 Mechanical key .......................48 POWER switch ...................157 Wireless remote control key....64

G

H

I

J

K

604

Alphabetical index

License plate lights Replacing light bulbs .............471 Wattage.................................560

Light bulbs Replacing ..............................471 Wattage.................................560

Lights Door courtesy lights ..............364 Emergency flasher switch .....484 Fog light switch .....................198 Hazard light switch ................484 Headlights switch ..................192 Interior light switch ................365 Personal light switch .............366 Replacing light bulbs .............471 Turn signal lever....................170 Vanity lights...........................377 Wattage.................................560

Load capacity ...........................228 Lock steering column..............161

Maintenance Do-it-yourself

maintenance .......................423 General maintenance............418 Maintenance data..................550 Maintenance requirements....416 Reset the maintenance

data.....................................416 Meter

Instrument panel light control .................................177

Meters ...................................174 Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror.............91 Outside rear view mirror

defogger..............................248 Outside rear view mirrors ........93 Vanity mirrors ........................377

Moon roof ...................................98 MP3 disc ...................................274 Multi-information display ........185

Noise from under vehicle..........20

Odometer..................................174 Oil

Engine oil ..............................430 Opener

Fuel filler door .......................102 Hood .....................................426 Trunk.......................................72

Outside rear view mirrors Adjusting and folding...............93 Defogger ...............................248

Outside temperature display ....................................379

Overheating, Hybrid system....................................542

Parking brake ...........................172 Parking lights

Switch ...................................192 Wattage.................................560

Personal lights Switch ...................................366 Wattage.................................560

Power outlet .............................381 POWER switch .....................157 POWER switch light.............364 Power windows..........................95

L

M

N

O

P

605

Alphabetical index

Radiator.................................... 436 Radio ........................................ 272 Rear seats

Folding down.......................... 79 Rear side marker lights

Replacing light bulb .............. 471 Switch................................... 192 Wattage................................ 560

Rear turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs ............ 471 Wattage................................ 560

Rear view mirror Compass .............................. 398

Rear window defogger............ 248 Replacing

Fuses.................................... 460 Key battery ........................... 458 Light bulbs ............................ 471 Tires ..................................... 519

Reporting safety defects for U.S.A. owners........................ 584

Safety Connect.........................402 Seat belts

Adjusting the seat belt.............83 Automatic Locking

Retractor ...............................85 Child restraint system

installation...........................135 Cleaning and maintaining

the seat belts ......................414 Emergency Locking

Retractor ...............................85 How to wear your seat belt......83 How your child should wear

the seat belt ..........................86 Pregnant women,

proper seat belt use ..............85 Reminder light .......................493 Seat belt extenders .................86 Seat belt pretensioners ...........84

Seat heaters..............................383 Seating capacity.......................228

R S

606

Alphabetical index

Seats Adjustment ........................76, 79 Adjustment precautions...........78 Child seats/child restraint

system installation ..............135 Cleaning................................413 Head restraint..........................81 Properly sitting in the seat.....111 Rear seat folding down ...........79 Seat heaters..........................383

Service reminder indicators ..............................180

Shift lever If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P.................533 Transmission.........................168

Shift lock system .....................533 Side airbags..............................113 Side marker lights

Replacing light bulbs .............471 Switch....................................192 Wattage.................................560

Side mirror Adjusting and folding...............93 Defogger ...............................248

Smart key system Entry function ..........................51 Starting the hybrid system.....157

Spare tire Inflation pressure...................449 Storage location ....................519

Spark plug ................................555 Specifications...........................550 Speedometer ............................174 Steering

Column lock release..............161

Steering wheel Adjustment ..............................90 Audio switches ......................254

Stop/tail lights Replacing light bulbs.............471 Wattage.................................560

Storage feature ........................367 Storage precautions ................224 Stuck

If your vehicle becomes stuck ...................................547

Sun visors ................................376 Sunshade

Roof ........................................99 Switch

Emergency flasher switch .....484 Fog light switch .....................198 Hazard light switch................484 Ignition switch .......................157 Light switches .......................192 Power door lock switch ...........67 POWER switch ...................157 Power window switch..............95 Window lock switch.................95 Wiper and washer switch ......200

607

Alphabetical index

Tail lights Replacing light bulbs ............ 471 Switch................................... 192 Wattage................................ 560

Theft deterrent system Alarm.................................... 108 Immobilizer system............... 106

Tire inflation pressure ............ 449 Tire information

Glossary ............................... 570 Size ...................................... 567 Tire identification number ..... 566 Uniform tire quality

grading............................... 568 Tires

Chains .................................. 229 Checking .............................. 443 If you have a flat tire ............. 519 Inflation pressure.................. 449 Inflation pressure sensor ...... 444 Replacing ............................. 519 Rotating tires ........................ 443 Size ...................................... 558 Snow tires............................. 229 Spare tire.............................. 519 Tire pressure warning

system........................ 443, 493 Warning light ........................ 493

Tools .........................................519 Total load capacity...................228 Towing

Dinghy towing........................234 Trailer towing.........................233

TRAC.........................................208 Traction control........................208 Transmission

Hybrid transmission...............168 If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P......................533 Trip information .......................185 Trip meter .........................174, 185 Trunk

Opener ....................................72 Trunk light

Trunk light ...............................73 Wattage.................................560

Turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs .............471 Switch....................................170 Wattage.................................560

Vanity lights Vanity lights...........................377 Wattage.................................560

Vanity mirrors...........................377 Vehicle data recordings ............22 Vehicle identification

number ...................................550 Vehicle stability control...........208 VSC............................................208

T

V

608

Alphabetical index

Warning buzzers Brake system ........................490 Electric power steering

system ................................491 Open door .............................493 Seat belt reminder.................493

Warning lights Anti-lock brake system..........491 Brake assist system ..............491 Brake system ........................490 Charging system ...................491 Electric power steering

system ................................491 Engine coolant

temperature ........................491 Engine oil pressure ...............491 Low fuel level ........................493 Low tire pressure warning

light .....................................493 Malfunction indicator lamp ....491 Master warning light ..............493 Open door .............................493 Pretensioners ........................491 Seat belt reminder light .........493 Slip indicator..........................491 SRS airbags ..........................491 Tire pressure warning light....493

Warning messages Blind Spot monitor.........502, 503 Cruise control ........................502 EV drive mode.......................503 Headlight ...............................503 Hood......................................503 Hybrid system .......................501 Hybrid system overheat ........503 Maintenance..........................503 Moon roof ..............................503 N position ..............................503 Open door .............................503 Parking brake........................503 P position ..............................503 Smart key system..........502, 510 Steering lock .........................502

Traction battery .....................503 Trunk.....................................503 Washer fluid ..........................503

Washer Preparing and checking

before winter.......................229 Refilling .................................438 Switch ...................................200

Washing and waxing ...............410 Weight

Cargo capacity ......................224 Load limits.............................228 Weight...................................550

Wheels ......................................453 Window glasses ........................95 Window lock switch...................95 Windows

Power windows.......................95 Rear window defogger ..........248 Washer..................................200

Windshield wipers ...................200 Wireless remote control key

Replacing the battery ............458 Wireless remote control ..........64

WMA disc..................................274

W

609

What to do if...

What to do if...

A tire punctures P. 519 If you have a flat tire

The hybrid system does not start

P. 531 If the hybrid system will not start

P. 106 Immobilizer system

P. 538 If the vehicles 12-volt battery is discharged

P. 535 If the electronic key does not oper- ate properly

The shift lever cannot be moved out

P. 533 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

The rightmost segment of the engine coolant temperature dis- play flashes

Steam can be seen coming from under the hood

P. 542 If your vehicle overheats

The key is lost P. 534 If you lose your keys

The 12-volt battery runs out P. 538 If the vehicles 12-volt battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked P. 67 Doors

The horn begins to sound P. 108 Alarm

610

What to do if...

The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand

P. 547 If the vehicle becomes stuck

A warning light or indicator light comes on

P. 490 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

611

What to do if...

Warning lights

P. 491

or

P. 490 P. 493

P. 491 P. 491

P. 491 P. 493

P. 491 P. 493

P. 493

or

P. 491 P. 493

P. 491

or

P. 491 P. 491

Brake system warning light (red indicator)

Slip indicator light

Tire pressure warning light

Brake system warning light (yellow indicator)

Electric power steering sys- tem warning light

Charging system warn- ing light

Open door warning light

Low engine oil pressure warning light

Low fuel level warning light

Malfunction indicator lamp

Drivers/front passengers seat belt reminder light

Master warning light

SRS warning light High engine cool- ant temperature warning light (the rightmost seg- ment of the engine coolant tempera- ture display flashes)

ABS warning light

A warning message is displayed P. 500 If a warning message is displayed

612

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 426

Trunk opener

P. 72

Fuel filler door

P. 102

Hood lock release lever

P. 426

Fuel filler door opener

P. 102 <

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Camry HV Toyota works, you can view and download the Toyota Camry HV 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Toyota Camry HV as well as other Toyota manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Toyota Camry HV. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Toyota Camry HV 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Toyota Camry HV 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Toyota Camry HV 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Toyota Camry HV 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Toyota Camry HV 2014 Sedan Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.